JP6722223B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

2. Description of the Related Art In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a technique relating to a signal line connecting electric components such as a CPU and a ROM has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-223336, A

According to the technique described in Patent Document 1, there is a possibility that an appropriate substrate configuration cannot be obtained, for example, signal synchronization is likely to be disturbed.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which an appropriate substrate configuration can be provided.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the present application is a gaming machine that can perform variable display of identification information and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player, and a pattern that configures a plurality of signal wirings. A parallel wiring part having a first shape in which the plurality of signal wirings are parallel or substantially parallel to each other; and the plurality of signals. At least one of the signal wirings includes a specific wiring portion having a second shape that is not parallel to other signal wirings, and the signal wirings included in the plurality of signal wirings have the same or substantially the same wiring length. Further, the display means is capable of being displaced into a plurality of states and capable of displaying an image, and the specific effect means capable of executing a specific effect for maintaining the state of the display means. It is possible to perform an effect in which the period for maintaining the first state and the period for maintaining the second state are different, and it is expected that the advantageous state is controlled according to the length of the period for maintaining the second state. The display means displays the first image in the first direction corresponding to the operation direction of the first motion in relation to the first motion in which the first state is displaced from the first state to the second state. In association with the second motion of displacing from the second state to the first state, a second image is motion-displayed in a second direction corresponding to the motion direction of the second motion, and variable display of identification information is supported. Then, a variable display of simple identification information that is simpler than the identification information can be displayed, and the variable display of simple identification information is displayed in different modes in the first state and the second state. To do.
(B) In the gaming machine of (A), the specific wiring portion is provided with a first signal wiring and a plurality of second signal wirings having the second shape that are not parallel to the first signal wiring. In the specific wiring portion, at least two of the second signal wirings are adjacent to each other, a conductor is not provided in a predetermined area between the adjacent second signal wirings, and an electric signal transmitted by the predetermined signal wiring is A synchronous signal that is synchronized with an electric signal transmitted by another signal wiring, and an asynchronous signal that is not synchronized with an electric signal transmitted by another signal wiring, wherein the asynchronous signal is transmitted by the first signal wiring. It may be
(1) To achieve the above object, the present application Yu technique machine, a game capable gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game machine 1), a pattern constituting a plurality of signal lines are formed (for example, FIG. 17 ), a board (for example, a main board 11 or the like) to which a plurality of electric components (for example, the RAM 102 and the CPU 103) are connected by the plurality of signal wirings, and the pattern is such that the plurality of signal wirings are parallel or substantially parallel. A parallel wiring portion having a first shape (for example, the region 30AK10R) and a specific wiring portion having a second shape in which at least one signal wiring of the plurality of signal wirings is not parallel to another signal wiring (for example, a region). 30AK11R, etc.), the wiring lengths of the signal wirings included in the plurality of signal wirings are the same or substantially the same, and further, a specific production means (eg, a sub production) capable of executing a specific production that maintains the aspect of the production. The effect control CPU 90120 or the like capable of executing a specific effect for maintaining the orientation of the image display device 9051), and a period for maintaining the first aspect as the specific effect (a period for maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 in the vertical direction). And a period in which the second mode is maintained (a period in which the sub-image display device 9051 is horizontally maintained) can be executed, and the advantageous state is set according to the length of the period in which the second mode is maintained. It is characterized in that the degree of expectation to be controlled is different (for example, the longer the sub-image display device 9051 is kept in the horizontal direction when the specific effect is executed, the higher the degree of expectation of a big hit).
With such a configuration, an appropriate substrate configuration can be achieved. Further, it is possible to pay attention to the period in which the mode of production is maintained.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1), the signal wiring not including the second shape (for example, the signal wiring formed by the wiring pattern 30AK10D) has a distance between the connection terminals of the plurality of electric parts as described above. It may be longer than the signal wiring including the second shape (for example, the signal wiring formed by the wiring patterns 30AK11D to 30AK13D).
With such a structure, an appropriate substrate structure is possible.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, a conductor may not be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the space area 30AK0SP) close to the signal wiring having the second shape.
With such a structure, an appropriate substrate structure is possible.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3), the board is electrically provided with a signal wiring provided on one surface of the board and a signal wiring provided on the other surface of the board. Through holes (for example, through holes 30AK1H, 30AK2H, etc.) that can be connected to the through holes are provided, and the wiring length of each signal wiring included in the plurality of signal wirings is the same as that of the signal wirings connected by the through holes. The lengths may be the same or substantially the same.
With such a structure, an appropriate substrate structure is possible.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4), the substrate has a plurality of layers (for example, a surface layer 30AK1S, a ground layer 30AK1L, a power supply layer 30AK2L, a wiring layer 30AK3L, a power supply layer 30AK4L, a back surface layer). 30AK2S or the like), and the signal may not be transmitted in a conductor layer (for example, the ground layer 30AK1L) adjacent to a layer in which the signal wiring having the second shape is provided among the plurality of layers.
With such a structure, an appropriate substrate structure is possible.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5), as the plurality of electric components, processing means capable of executing a predetermined process (for example, the CPU 103) and information regarding execution of the process are stored. It may be connected to a possible storage means (for example, RAM 102).
With such a structure, an appropriate substrate structure is possible.

(7) Alternatively, in a game machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko game machine 1 or the like), a pattern forming a plurality of signal wirings is formed (see, for example, FIG. 17 ), and a plurality of signal wirings are provided. The pattern includes a substrate (for example, the main substrate 11 or the like) to which electrical components (for example, the RAM 102 and the CPU 103) are connected, and the pattern has a parallel wiring portion (for example, a region) having a first shape in which the plurality of signal wirings are parallel or substantially parallel. 30AK10R) and at least one signal wiring of the plurality of signal wirings includes a specific wiring portion (for example, a region 30AK11R) having a second shape different from the first shape, The wiring lengths of the included signal wirings may be the same or substantially the same.
Even with such a configuration, an appropriate substrate configuration can be achieved.

(8) Alternatively, in a game machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko game machine 1 or the like), a pattern forming a plurality of signal wirings is formed (see, for example, FIG. 17), and a plurality of signal wirings are provided. A board (for example, the main board 11 or the like) to which electric components (for example, the RAM 102 and the CPU 103) are connected is provided, and in the pattern, at least one signal wiring of the plurality of signal wirings includes a linear shape or a substantially linear shape. A first pattern (for example, a wiring pattern 30AK10D) having a first shape and another signal wiring not included in the first pattern among the plurality of signal wirings have a second shape different from the first shape. The second pattern (for example, wiring patterns 30AK11D to 30AK13D), the first pattern and the second pattern have the same or substantially the same wiring length of each signal wiring included in the plurality of signal wirings. May be.
Even with such a configuration, an appropriate substrate configuration can be achieved.

(9) Alternatively, in a gaming machine that can play a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like), a pattern that forms a plurality of signal wirings is formed (see, for example, FIG. 17), and a plurality of signal wirings are provided. The pattern includes a substrate (for example, a main substrate 11 or the like) to which electric components (for example, the RAM 102 and the CPU 103) are connected, and at least one signal wiring of the plurality of signal wirings has a predetermined section (for example, section 30AK0SC or the like) in the pattern. A first pattern (for example, wiring patterns 30AK10D, 30AK11D, etc.) connecting the wirings at the shortest or substantially the shortest distance, and other signal wiring not included in the first pattern among the plurality of signal wirings, A second pattern (for example, wiring patterns 30AK12D, 30AK13D, etc.) connected at a distance longer than the first pattern, wherein the first pattern and the second pattern are signal wirings included in the plurality of signal wirings. The wiring lengths may be the same or substantially the same.
Even with such a configuration, an appropriate substrate configuration can be achieved.

(10) In the gaming machine according to (8) or (9), the first pattern may have a distance between connection terminals of the plurality of electric components longer than that of the second pattern.
With such a structure, an appropriate substrate structure is possible.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (8) to (10) above, a conductor may not be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the space area 30AK0SP) close to the second pattern.
With such a structure, an appropriate substrate structure is possible.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (8) to (11), the substrate has a plurality of layers (for example, a surface layer 30AK1S, a ground layer 30AK1L, a power supply layer 30AK2L, a wiring layer 30AK3L, a power supply layer 30AK4L, a back surface layer). 30AK2S or the like), and the signal may not be transmitted in a conductor layer (for example, the ground layer 30AK1L or the like) adjacent to a layer in which the signal wiring included in the second pattern is provided among the plurality of layers.
With such a structure, an appropriate substrate structure is possible.

Further, the modes for carrying out the invention described below include the inventions according to the following (13) to (18). 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been a game machine capable of executing an effect that maintains the aspect of the effect, as disclosed in JP-A-2014-117576. However, although the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine is capable of executing an effect that maintains the aspect of the effect, it is not possible to pay attention to the period in which the aspect of the effect is maintained. In view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine that can be noticed even during the period in which the mode of production is maintained.

(13) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901 or the like), and maintains a mode of production. A specific effect means capable of executing an effect (for example, effect control CPU 90120 capable of executing a specific effect that maintains the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051) is provided, and a period for maintaining the first aspect as the specific effect (secondary) It is possible to perform effects different from the period in which the image display device 9051 is maintained in the vertical direction and the period in which the second mode is maintained (the period in which the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the horizontal direction), and the second mode is maintained. The degree of expectation that is controlled to the advantageous state varies depending on the length of the period (for example, when the specific effect is executed, the longer the sub-image display device 9051 is held sideways, the greater the degree of expectation of jackpot). Is high).

With this configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the period in which the aspect of the effect is maintained.

(14) In the gaming machine of (13) above, the expectation that the advantageous state is controlled is higher when the second mode is maintained than when the first mode is maintained. Other effects are easily executed (e.g., even if the count-up notice effect has the same number of counts by a predetermined character, it is executed when the specific effect is executed and the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the horizontal direction. The jackpot expectation of the count-up notice effect is higher than the jackpot expectation of the count-up notice effect executed when the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the portrait orientation without executing the particular effect), You may do it.

According to this configuration, when the aspect of the specific effect is maintained in the second aspect, by executing another effect, it is possible to increase the expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state.

(15) In the gaming machine of (13) or (14) above, a notification effect means (for example, a sub-image display device 9051) capable of executing a notification effect that notifies that the mode of the specific effect is the second mode. May further include an effect control CPU 90120 or the like) capable of executing a notification effect that notifies that the player has turned sideways.

According to this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the aspect of the specific effect is the second aspect.

(16) In the gaming machine according to any one of (13) to (15), as the specific effect, an effect that changes stepwise from the first aspect to the second aspect in response to a plurality of variable displays. (For example, the pending change effect execution patterns HP4'-1 to HP4'-2, HP5'-1 to HP5'-2, HP6'-1 to HP6'-2, HP7'- shown in FIG. 46 can be executed. 1 to HP7'-2).

According to this configuration, the interest can be improved over a plurality of variable displays.

(17) In the gaming machine according to any one of (13) to (16), a predetermined effect means capable of executing a plurality of aspects of a predetermined effect (for example, effect control CPU 90120 or the like capable of executing a call notice effect) is further provided. According to which aspect of the predetermined effect is executed, the proportion of the aspect of the specific effect to be the second aspect is different (for example, when a call advance notice effect is executed, a call of a predetermined character is made. Is "I don't want to do it", the specific effect is executed, and the sub-image display device 9051 is likely to face sideways).

With this configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the predetermined effect.

(18) In the gaming machine according to any one of (13) to (17), during one variable display, an effect that changes from the first mode to the second mode and then changes to the first mode is performed a plurality of times. Executable (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, an effect of rotating the sub-image display device 9051 from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction and then to the vertical direction is executed a plurality of times during one variable display. This may be the case.

According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in one variable display.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of the gaming machine frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the state which looked at a substrate case. It is an exploded perspective view of the state which looked at a substrate case. It is a 6th view which shows a base member. It is a 6th view which shows a cover member. It is a perspective view of the state which looked at the receptacle. It is a rear view of the state which looked at the receptacle. It is sectional drawing of the state which looked at the receptacle. It is a figure which shows the transmission path corresponding to wiring. It is a figure which shows the transmission path of a power supply voltage. It is a figure which shows the relationship of wiring length, etc. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a filter circuit. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a noise prevention circuit. It is a figure which shows a power supply monitoring circuit. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the part in which the pattern of the wiring was formed. It is a figure showing the field and section for explaining the pattern of wiring. FIG. 19 is an enlarged view of the area shown in FIG. 18. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting corresponding to the pattern of wiring. FIG. 19 is an enlarged view of the area shown in FIG. 18. FIG. 19 is an enlarged view of the area shown in FIG. 18. It is sectional drawing which shows the structural example of a main board. It is a figure showing other examples of composition about a pattern of wiring. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in an embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the example of the various control boards mounted in the pachinko game machine of FIG. It is the figure which shows one example of the main production control command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of starting winning determination processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure reservation storage part. It is a flowchart etc. which show an example of a random number value determination process at the time of winning. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a jackpot type determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern setting processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern determination table for losses. It is an explanatory view explaining an example of the processing contents performed by command analysis processing. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of reservation change production setting processing. It is a figure which shows the execution determination example of a hold change production. It is a figure showing an example of execution decision of action production. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of a hold change effect execution pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of a hold change effect execution pattern. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control pattern setting processing. It is the figure which shows the execution decision example of the call advance notice production. It is the figure which shows the execution decision example of the count-up notice production. It is a figure showing an example of execution decision of a specific production. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of a specific production execution pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of a pseudo continuous production execution pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of a count-up notice production execution pattern. It is a figure showing an example of execution decision of development time production. It is the figure which shows one example of the production picture. It is the figure which shows one example of the production picture. It is the figure which shows one example of the production picture. It is the figure which shows one example of the production picture. It is the figure which shows one example of the production picture. It is the figure which shows one example of the production picture. It is the figure which shows one example of the production picture.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment. The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a gaming board 2 and a gaming machine frame 3. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame that rotatably supports the gaming machine frame 3. The game board 2 is a gauge board that constitutes a game board surface. The gaming machine frame 3 is an underframe for fixing the gaming board 2. On the game board 2, a game area surrounded by guide rails and the like is formed. The game ball (game medium) launched from the launch device passes through the launch passage and is driven into the game area. A glass door frame having a glass window is rotatably provided in the gaming machine frame 3.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2, a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, an image display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A, a normal variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7, The normal symbol display device 20, the first holding display device 25A, the second holding display device 25B, the general drawing holding display device 25C, the passage gate 41 and the like are provided. In addition, a windmill, a large number of obstacle nails, a general winning hole, an outlet, etc. may be provided on the game board surface in the game area. A game effect lamp 9 is provided in the periphery of the game area. Speakers 8L and 8R are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) is provided. The hit ball operation handle is operated by a player or the like in order to shoot the game ball toward the game area, and the resilience of the game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount (rotation amount). At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, an upper plate (hit ball supply plate) for holding (reserving) game balls and a lower plate for holding (reserving) surplus balls from the upper plate are provided. Has been. A stick controller 31A is attached to a member forming the lower plate, and a push button 31B is provided to a member forming the upper plate.

On the screens of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the image display device 5, etc., variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is performed. These variable displays are based on the occurrence of the first start prize due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening formed on the normal winning ball device 6A, or on the normal variable winning ball device 6B. Execution becomes possible based on the occurrence of the second start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the formed second starting winning opening. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are respectively configured by using, for example, 7-segment or dot-matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes), etc., and are identified in the special symbol game as an example of the variable display game. Special symbols (special symbols) that are information (special identification information) are variably displayed (variable display). The image display device 5 is configured by using, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the image display device 5, the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A in the special symbol game and the special symbol (second special symbol) by the second special symbol display device 4B Corresponding to each variable display, a decorative pattern that is identification information (decorative identification information) is variably displayed in a decorative pattern display area that is a plurality of variable display portions such as three. The variable display of the decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game. As an example, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged on the screen of the image display device 5.

A reserved storage display area 5H is arranged on the screen of the image display device 5. In the hold storage display area 5H, a hold display for displaying the number of variable display hold (special figure hold storage number) corresponding to the special figure game in a identifiable manner is performed. The hold display may be any display that can be displayed in correspondence with the hold storage of information regarding variable display. A hold display using the first hold display 25A and the second hold display 25B may be performed together with the hold storage display area 5H or instead of the hold storage display area 5H.

FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of various substrates and peripheral devices. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, a production control board 12, a sound control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15, a driver board 19, a power supply board 92, and the like. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, and a touch sensor board may be mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and electric components are mounted, but also electric components are mounted (mounted) on electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including an electronic circuit mounting board configured as described above.

The power supply board 92 is configured to be able to supply electric power from an AC power supply, which is an external power supply (commercial power supply), to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. The power supply board 92 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. Is prepared. The voltage generated by the power supply board 92 may be supplied to the main board 11, the effect control board 12, and the like via the drawer relay board.

A game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc. are mounted on the main board 11. On the main board 11, signals acquired from various detection switches such as the gate switch 21, the starting opening switches (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), and the count switch 23 are passed through the switch circuit 110. It is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The gate switch 21 detects a game ball (gate passing ball) that has passed through the passing gate 41. Based on the detection of the gate passing sphere by the gate switch 21, it is possible to perform the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 20. The first starting opening switch 22A detects a game ball that has passed (entered) through the first starting winning opening. The second starting port switch 22B detects a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning port. The count switch 23 detects a game ball that has passed (entered) the special winning opening. When a game ball that has passed through various winning openings such as a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, and a big winning opening is detected, the number of prize balls determined in advance corresponding to each winning opening As a game ball is paid out.

On the main board 11, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 is transmitted to a solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory and a solenoid 82 for a special winning opening door via a solenoid circuit 111. The solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is a state in which the game ball does not easily pass (or does not pass) and a state in which it easily passes (or passes) the second starting winning port formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B. It can be changed to and. The solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door allows the special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball device 7 to be changed between a state in which the game ball cannot pass and a state in which the game ball can pass. From the main board 11, a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the ordinary symbol display device 20, etc. is transmitted.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a RAM 102 for providing a game control work area. , A CPU 103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, a random number circuit 104 that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 103, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105. It is equipped with. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute processing for controlling the progress of a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, various random number values used for controlling the progress of the game are controlled by, for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. The numerical data shown is counted (generated) so that it can be updated. The random number used to control the progress of the game is also called a game random number.

The effect control board 12 receives the control signal (effect control command) transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, and the effect motor. It is possible to control the production operation by the production electric parts such as 60 and the production LED 61. On the effect control board 12, a CPU 120 for effect control, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display controller 123, a random number circuit 124, an I/O 125, etc. are mounted.

The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 uses the effect control program read from the ROM 121, fixed data, and the like to execute processing for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric parts. The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120. For example, the display control unit 123 performs control for executing variable display of decorative designs and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of effect images displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

A controller sensor unit 35A and a push sensor 35B are connected to the production control board 12. The controller sensor unit 35A includes a tilt direction sensor and a trigger sensor. The tilt direction sensor can detect the tilt direction of the operating rod using a plurality of sensors when the stick operation of the stick controller 31A is performed on the operating rod. The trigger sensor can detect the presence/absence of push/pull operation with respect to the trigger button provided on the operation stick of the stick controller 31A. That is, the controller sensor unit 35A can detect a player's operation using the stick controller 31A, such as a tilting operation of the stick controller 31A with respect to the operating rod and a push-pull operation of the trigger button. The push sensor 35B can detect an operation of the player using the push button 31B, such as a pressing operation on the push button 31B. In the effect control board 12, for example, by using a random number circuit 124 or a random counter for effect provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling execution of effect can be updated and counted ( Is generated). The random number used to control the execution of the effect is also referred to as a random number for effect.

The effect control board 12 has a first board 12A and a second board 12B that is board-to-board connected to the first board 12A. The first substrate 12A is provided with a CPU 120 for effect control, a graphics processor of the display control unit 123, etc., and the second substrate 12B is an electrical component in which data unique to the model such as a ROM 121 and an image data memory is stored. Is installed. The graphics processor of the display control unit 123 may be a microprocessor in which the functions of the effect control CPU 120 are integrated, or may be a microprocessor configured as a chip separate from the effect control CPU 120.

The voice control board 13 is a control board for voice output control that is provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A processing circuit or the like for executing audio signal processing for performing the processing is mounted. If the graphics controller or the like that constitutes the display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 can execute the audio signal processing, the audio control board 13 may be equipped with a bandpass filter, an amplifier circuit, or the like. Alternatively, the voice control board 13 may be omitted, and a bandpass filter, an amplifier circuit, etc. may be mounted on the board of the effect control board 12. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control that is provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on a command or control data from the effect control board 12, lighting or the like in the game effect lamp 9 or the like. It is equipped with a lamp driver circuit that turns off the lights. The driver board 19 is a control board for driving electric components provided separately from the performance control board 12, and based on commands and control data from the performance control board 12, various motors included in the performance motor 60. A driver circuit and the like for controlling the rotation of the LED, lighting control of various LEDs included in the effect LED 61, and the like are mounted. The output signal from the driver board 19 is transmitted to each motor included in the effect motor 60 and each LED included in the effect LED 61.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined game is played using a game ball as a game medium, and a predetermined game value can be added based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, a predetermined amount is determined based on a player performing a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) on a hitting ball operation handle provided at the lower right position of the game machine frame 3 in the pachinko game machine 1. A game ball as a game medium is launched toward the game area by a launch motor or the like provided in the hit ball launching device. When the game ball flowing down the game area passes (enters) various winning openings, the game ball as a prize ball is paid out. When the variable display result of the special design or the decorative design is "big hit", the special winning opening is opened and the game ball is easily passed (entered), which is advantageous for the player. It becomes a big hit game state.

The advantageous state is not limited to the big hit game state, and may include a special game state such as a time saving state or a probability variation state. In addition, the upper limit number of round games that can be executed in the big hit game state is the first round number (for example, "15") that is larger than the second round number (for example, "7"), and can be executed in the time saving state. The maximum number of times of variable display is the first number (eg, “100”) that is greater than the second number (eg, “50”), and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is higher than the second probability (eg, 1/50). 1 probability (for example, 1/20), and the number of consecutive chans, which is the number of times it is repeatedly controlled to the jackpot gaming state without being controlled to the normal state, is larger than the second consecutive chan number (for example, "5"). It may include that a gaming situation becomes more advantageous to the player, such as a part or all of the situation that one consecutive chan number (for example, "10") is reached.

In the main board 11, when power supply from the power supply board 92 is started, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 starts execution of the game control main processing. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 performs necessary initialization after setting the interrupt prohibition. When the initial settings are completed, interrupts are enabled, and then loop processing starts. After that, the interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 periodically executes the game control timer interrupt process.

The game control timer interrupt processing includes switch processing, main side error processing, information output processing, game random number update processing, special symbol process processing, normal symbol process processing, command control processing, and the like. In the switch processing, the states of detection signals input from various switches are determined. In the main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary. In the information output processing, predetermined data supplied to the hall management computer is output. In the game random number updating process, at least a part of the game random number is updated by software. In the special symbol process process, various processes are selected and executed in order to perform display control of the special symbol, opening/closing operation setting of the special winning opening, and the like in a predetermined procedure. In the normal symbol process process, various processes are selected and executed in order to perform display control of the normal symbol, tilting motion setting of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, and the like in a predetermined procedure.

In the special symbol process process, first, a start winning determination process is executed. After the start winning determination process is executed, the process selected according to the value of the special figure process flag is executed. The processes that can be selected at this time include special symbol normal process, variation pattern setting process, special symbol variation process, special symbol stop process, big hit opening pre-process, big hit opening middle process, big hit opening post process, big hit end process, etc. Just go.

In the starting winning determination process, it is determined whether or not the first starting winning and the second starting winning are generated, and if they are generated, the setting for updating the special figure reservation storage number is performed. In the special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether to start the execution of the special symbol game. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is "big hit". Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, the setting of the fixed special symbol in the special symbol game is performed in correspondence with the variable display result. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the variable display result and the like. In the special symbol variation process, settings for varying the special symbol, settings for measuring the elapsed time from the start of variation, and the like are performed. In the special symbol stop processing, the variation of the special symbol is stopped, and the setting for stopping display (deriving) of the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result is performed.

In the big hit opening pre-processing, the variable display result corresponds to "big hit", and settings for opening the big winning opening in the big hit game state are performed. In the big hit open process, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening is returned from the open state to the closed state. In the jackpot opening post-processing, after returning the special winning opening to the closed state, it is determined whether or not the number of times of execution of the round has reached the upper limit value, and if not reached, the next round can be executed, and if it has been reached, Settings for ending the jackpot gaming state are made. In the big hit ending process, after waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the execution period of the ending effect for notifying the end of the big hit game state has elapsed, settings for starting the probability variation control and the time saving control are performed.

In the effect control board 12, when power supply from the power supply board 92 is started, the effect control CPU 120 starts execution of effect control main processing. In the effect control main processing, after a predetermined initialization is performed, every time a timer interrupt occurs, command analysis processing, effect control process processing, and effect random number updating processing are executed. In the command analysis process, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 is analyzed, and a flag corresponding to the analysis result is set. In the effect control process process, various processes are selected and executed in order to control the electric parts for effect in accordance with a predetermined procedure. In the production random number updating process, the count value for generating the production random numbers is updated by software.

In the effect control process process, first, a hold display update process is executed. After executing the hold display updating process, the process selected according to the value of the effect process flag is executed. At this time, the selectable process may include a variable display start waiting process, a variable display start setting process, a variable display effect process, a variable display stop process, a big hit display process, a big hit effect process, an ending effect process, and the like. ..

In the hold display update process, settings for updating the display of the hold storage display area 5H according to the number of special figure hold memories are performed. In the variable display start waiting process, it is determined whether to start the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. In the variable display start setting process, settings for starting the variable display of the decorative pattern are performed. In the variable display during effect processing, settings for controlling the electric parts for effect according to the effect control pattern are performed in correspondence with the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the variable display stop process, the control for deriving the fixed display of the variable display result by stopping the variable display of the decorative design is performed.

In the big hit display process, the variable display result corresponds to "big hit", and control for executing an effect (fanfare effect) for notifying the occurrence of the big hit is performed. In the big hit medium production process, settings for controlling the electric parts for production in accordance with the production control pattern are performed corresponding to the big hit game state. In the ending effect process, settings for controlling the execution of the ending effect are performed in response to the end of the big hit game state.

FIG. 3 is a rear view of the gaming machine frame 3 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A ball tank 150 and a terminal board 154 are provided on the upper rear surface of the gaming machine frame 3. Further, a supply passage 151, a payout device 152, and a prize ball passage 153 are also provided. On the back surface of the game board 2, a board case 400 for a game control board, a board case 800 for a production control board, and a cover body 301 are provided. The board case 400 houses the main board 11. The board case 800 houses the effect control board 12. The cover body 301 is made of a transparent synthetic resin or the like, and covers the substrate case 800 and the upper portion of the substrate case 400. At a lower position of the board case 400 for the game control board, a payout control board 91 and a power supply board 92 are provided so as to overlap with each other in the front and rear.

The structure of the board case 800 for the production control board will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 7. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing the substrate case 800 as viewed from diagonally above the left rear portion. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view showing the substrate case 800 as seen from diagonally above the right front portion. FIG. 6 is a six-sided view showing the base member 801. FIG. 7 is a six-sided view showing the cover member 802. The substrate case 800 is composed of a base member 801 and a cover member 802, and is assembled so as to sandwich the effect control substrate 12 from the front and rear. The base member 801 covers the front side of the effect control board 12, and the cover member 802 covers the back side of the effect control board 12.

The base member 801 is made of a transparent thermoplastic synthetic resin, and is composed of a base plate 801a formed in a vertically long and substantially rectangular shape, and side walls 801b to 801e vertically provided on the upper and lower sides and the left and right side edges toward the back side. , Is formed in a box shape that opens toward the back side. On the base plate 801a, bosses 803, 804, locking bars 805, locking hooks 806, locking holes 807, locked portions 808, screw holes 810 of one-way screws 809, mounting holes 811, board supporting ribs 812, 813, step portions 814a and 814b, and a rib 815 are provided.

The cover member 802 is made of a transparent thermoplastic synthetic resin and is composed of a base plate 821a formed in a vertically long and substantially rectangular shape, and side walls 821b to 811e which are vertically provided on the upper and lower sides and the left and right side sides toward the back side. , Is formed in a box shape that opens toward the back side. The base plate 821a has a screw hole 823 into which a screw 822 is screwed, a positioning protrusion 824, a screw hole 826 into which a screw 825 is screwed, a positioning protrusion 827, a locking hook 831, a locking piece 832, and a locking member. A portion 833, a mounting piece 834 in which a mounting hole 834a of the one-way screw 809 is formed, a switch opening 835 for exposing the volume adjusting switch 835a to the outside, and connector openings 836, 837 are provided.

The connector opening 836 is formed in a vertically long shape on the upper right side of the base plate 821a so as to expose the various board-side connectors KCN10 mounted on the first board 12A to the outside. The various board-side connectors KCN10 may include the receptacles KRE1 to KRE4. The receptacle KRE1 is a connector port for main board wiring. The receptacle KRE2 is a connector port for wiring the power board. The receptacle KRE3 is a connector port for driver board wiring. The receptacle KRE4 is a connector port for wiring the voice control board. The layout of the receptacles and the wiring to be connected may be arbitrarily changed according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board wiring receptacle KRE1 has a configuration of a wiring connection device capable of detachably connecting a signal wiring (main board wiring) electrically connected to the main board 11. The power supply board wiring receptacle KRE2 has a configuration of a wiring connection device capable of detachably connecting signal wiring (power supply board wiring) electrically connected to the power supply board 92. The driver substrate wiring receptacle KRE3 has a configuration of a wiring connection device capable of detachably connecting signal wiring (driver substrate wiring) electrically connected to the driver substrate 19. The voice control board wiring receptacle KRE4 has a configuration of a wiring connection device capable of detachably connecting signal wiring (voice control board wiring) electrically connected to the voice control board 13.

8 to 10 show a configuration example of the receptacle KRE1. FIG. 8A is a perspective view showing a state of the left rear portion as viewed from diagonally below. FIG. 8(B) is a perspective view showing a state of the left rear portion as viewed from diagonally above. FIG. 9 is a rear view showing a state in which the vicinity of the receptacle KRE1 is viewed from the back side (rear side) outside the cover member 802. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the vicinity of the receptacle KRE1 is viewed from the lower side. The receptacle KRE1 includes a housing in which the insertion opening OP1 is formed and terminals TA01 to TA03.

The insertion port OP1 is an opening into which a connector plug provided on the main board wiring can be inserted and mounted. The terminals TA01 to TA03 are made of, for example, a metal such as copper, and correspond to the plurality of terminals provided on the connector plug when the connector plug of the main board wiring is inserted into the insertion port OP1. It is a metal member that comes into contact with a terminal arranged at a position to be electrically conductive. In the receptacle KRE1, a pair of ground terminals, TA01 and TA03, are surface-mounted on the board of the production control board 12 at positions sandwiching both sides of the terminal TA02 which is a signal terminal. The main board wiring may be provided with a pair of ground lines serving as ground voltage lines at positions sandwiching both sides of the signal line serving as a signal transmission line. Alternatively, a coaxial cable may be used as the main board wiring, and the inner conductor of the coaxial cable may be electrically connected to the terminal TA02 and the outer conductor of the coaxial cable may be electrically connected to the terminals TA01 and TA03. Good.

In the receptacle KRE1, the terminals TA01 to TA03 are pulled out to the outside on a side surface PL1 that is a terminal placement surface, and can be bonded to a connection pad provided on the board of the production control board 12 (first board 12A). The method of joining the terminal to the connection pad may be a metal joining method using solder or the like, or an adhesive joining method such as conductive resin joining or anisotropic conductive member joining. Fixing metal fittings SS01, SS02 are provided on the side of the side surface PL2 which is the back side of the side surface PL1.

In the cover member 802 of the substrate case 800, in the connector opening 836, the opening region 836a formed corresponding to the receptacle KRE1 has a narrower opening width than the opening regions formed corresponding to the other receptacles. May be formed. The terminals TA01 to TA03 of the receptacle KRE1 are each formed to have an exposed portion exposed from the substrate case 800 in the opening region 836a and a coated portion that is covered by the substrate case 800 and is not exposed. For example, in the terminals TA01 to TA03, the tip end portion that is joined to the corresponding connection pad may be included in the covering portion that is covered by the cover member 802 of the substrate case 800 and is not exposed.

In the cover member 802 of the substrate case 800, if the component housing portion 802a and the opening peripheral edge portion 840 forming the inner peripheral wall surface 836b that is the inner end surface of the opening region 836a are integrally formed via the sloped portion 821e1. Good. The component housing portion 802a is formed to be able to house at least a part of the electric components mounted on the board of the effect control board 12. In the opening region 836a, the distance between the inner peripheral wall surface 836b and the receptacle KRE1 is such that the distance between the inner peripheral wall surface 836b on the side far from the component housing portion 802a and the side surface PL2 of the receptacle KRE1 is the opening width W1 and the component housing portion 802a An opening width W2 is a distance between the inner wall surface 836b on the near side and a side surface PL1 which is a terminal arrangement surface of the receptacle KRE1. Then, the arrangement of the opening region 836a and the receptacle KRE1 may be adjusted so that the opening width W2 is wider than the opening width W1. In the terminals TA01 to TA03 of the receptacle KRE1, the tip end portions that are joined to the corresponding connection pads and are mounted on the surface at the mounting position are covered with the opening peripheral edge portion 840 that forms the inner peripheral wall surface 836b in the opening region 836a. The opening peripheral portion 840 of the cover member 802 and the substrate surface of the effect control substrate 12 form a space SP1 as a space in proximity to the mounting position of the receptacle KRE1.

The terminal TA01 is bonded to the dummy pad DP1 provided on the substrate of the effect control substrate 12. The terminal TA03 is joined to the dummy pad DP2 provided on the substrate of the effect control substrate 12. The terminals TA01 and TA03 are joined to the connection pad GPA1. The connection pad GPA1 may be connected to the wiring layer LY4 in which the wiring pattern for grounding is formed via the through hole provided in the effect control board 12. In the substrate cross section of the effect control substrate 12 shown in FIG. 10, the wiring layer LY2 is formed between the insulating layer LY1 and the insulating layer LY3, and the surface on which the receptacle KRE1 is mounted is protected by using, for example, polyimide. It is sufficient that the layer LY0 is formed. In this way, the wiring pattern in the effect control board 12 may be formed in the wiring layer LY2 provided between the insulating layer LY1 and the insulating layer LY3, which are inner layers in the board of the effect control board 12. Alternatively, the wiring pattern on the effect control board 12 may be formed on the surface of the effect control board 12. The terminal TA02 is joined to a connection pad electrically connected to a wiring pattern for signal transmission.

The fixing metal fitting SS01 included in the receptacle KRE1 is joined to the dummy pad DP3 provided on the substrate of the effect control substrate 12. The fixing metal fitting SS02 included in the receptacle KRE1 is joined to the dummy pad DP4 provided on the substrate of the effect control substrate 12. In this way, the fixing metal fittings SS01, SS02 are provided on the substrate of the production control board 12 on the side of the side surface PL2, which is the rear surface side of the side surface PL1 on which the terminals TA01 to TA03 are arranged, and the dummy pads DP3, DP4. To be joined to.

When the production control command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12, the main board wiring for transmitting the command may have only one signal line serving as a signal transmission line. .. Correspondingly, in the receptacle KRE1 which is surface-mounted on the board of the effect control board 12, only the terminal TA02 which is a signal terminal may be provided. In this case, the area of the joint surface on the board of the effect control board 12 according to the lateral width and depth of the receptacle KRE1 is larger than the amount of protrusion of the effect control board 12 from the board surface according to the height of the receptacle KRE1. Since it tends to decrease, there is a possibility that sufficient bonding strength cannot be secured due to surface mounting of the receptacle KRE1. Therefore, in the receptacle KRE1, a pair of terminals TA01 and TA03, which are ground terminals, are surface-mounted on the board of the production control board 12 at positions sandwiching both sides of the terminal TA02, which is a signal terminal. As a result, it is possible to realize an appropriate board configuration that can sufficiently secure the bonding strength of the surface mounting of the receptacle KRE1. Moreover, since both sides of the terminal TA02 which is a signal terminal are sandwiched by the pair of terminals TA01 and TA03 which are ground terminals, it is possible to realize an appropriate substrate configuration which is hardly influenced by noise.

In the receptacle KRE1, the terminal TA01 is joined to the dummy pad DP1 provided on the substrate of the effect control substrate 12, and the terminal TA03 is joined to the dummy pad DP2 provided on the substrate of the effect control substrate 12. Further, the tips of the terminals TA01 to TA03 are arranged so as to be covered by the cover member 802 of the substrate case 800. Since the terminals TA01 and TA03 are bonded to the dummy pads DP1 and DP2 as described above, it is possible to realize an appropriate substrate structure that can sufficiently secure the bonding strength of the surface mounting of the receptacle KRE1. Since the tips of the terminals TA01 to TA03 are covered with the cover member 802 of the substrate case 800, an appropriate substrate configuration capable of protecting an important part in surface mounting such as a joint portion between the terminal and the substrate surface becomes possible. The terminal TA02 that serves as a signal terminal may be bonded to the dummy pad or may not be bonded to the dummy pad. By preventing the terminal TA02 serving as a signal terminal from being joined to the dummy pad, signal deterioration due to the influence of the conductor shape may be prevented.

In the receptacle KRE1, on the side of the side surface PL2, which is the rear surface side of the side surface PL1 on which the terminals TA01 to TA03 are arranged, the fixing metal fitting SS01 is joined and fixed to the dummy pad DP3 provided on the substrate of the performance control board 12. The metal fitting SS02 is joined to the dummy pad DP4 provided on the board of the effect control board 12. In this way, since the fixing metal fittings SS01, SS02 are bonded to the dummy pads DP3, DP4, it is possible to realize an appropriate substrate configuration that can sufficiently secure the bonding strength by the surface mounting of the receptacle KRE1. It should be noted that regardless of the method of joining the metal member such as the fixing metal fittings SS01 and SS02 on the substrate, for example, a fixing member made of a synthetic resin similar to the housing of the receptacle KRE1 may be adhered on the substrate. Any material can be used as long as it can bond the member onto the substrate.

The component housing portion 802a of the cover member 802 of the substrate case 800 is formed so as to be able to accommodate at least a part of the electric components mounted on the substrate of the effect control substrate 12, and the inner peripheral wall surface 836b and the receptacle KRE1 in the opening region 836a are formed. Is formed such that the opening width W2 on the side closer to the component housing portion 802a is wider than the opening width W1 on the far side. The side close to the component accommodating portion 802a is the side of the side surface PL1 that is the terminal placement surface on which the terminals TA01 to TA03 of the receptacle KRE1 are drawn out. On the other hand, the side farther from the component accommodating portion 802a is the side surface PL2 that is the rear surface side of the terminal arrangement surface in the receptacle KRE1. Therefore, the distance between the inner peripheral wall surface 836b and the receptacle KRE1 in the opening region 836a is set such that the opening width W2 on the side corresponding to the side surface PL1 serving as the terminal placement surface corresponds to the side surface PL2 serving as the back surface of the terminal placement surface. It is formed wider than W1. Since the opening width is adjusted in this way, for example, an appropriate substrate configuration that enables easy attachment/detachment and alignment of the cover member 802 is possible. In addition, it is possible to provide an appropriate substrate configuration that can prevent damage caused by collision between the terminal arrangement surface of the receptacle KRE1 and the cover member 802 when the cover member 802 is attached or detached.

The terminals TA01 to TA03 of the receptacle KRE1 have an exposed portion that is not covered with the cover member 802 of the substrate case 800 and an exposed portion that is covered with the cover member 802 of the substrate case 800 and is not exposed in the opening region 836a. It In this manner, unlike the exposed portion, each of the terminals TA01 to TA03 is formed with a covered portion that is covered and not exposed, so that an important portion in surface mounting such as a joint portion between the terminal and the substrate surface can be protected. Appropriate substrate configurations are possible.

In the terminals TA01 to TA03 of the receptacle KRE1, the mounting position which is surface-mounted so as to be bonded to the corresponding connection pad on the board of the effect control board 12 is the opening of the cover member 802 forming the inner peripheral wall surface 836b in the opening area 836a. It is covered by the peripheral portion 840. Then, the opening peripheral portion 840 of the cover member 802 and the board surface of the effect control board 12 form a space SP1 close to the mounting position of the receptacle KRE1. In this way, since the opening peripheral edge portion 840 of the cover member 802 and the board surface of the effect control board 12 are positionally adjustable, an appropriate board structure capable of protecting the mounting position of the receptacle KRE1 becomes possible.

FIG. 11A shows a transmission path corresponding to the main board wiring. As shown in FIG. 11A, the signal SCD supplied to the terminal TA02 in the main board wiring receptacle KRE1 is input to the effect control CPU 120 via the input driver circuit 130. The terminals TA01 and TA03 of the receptacle KRE1 are grounded (connected to the ground line).

FIG. 11B shows the transmission path corresponding to the power supply board wiring. The power supply board wiring receptacle KRE2 includes terminals TA11 to TA30. Of these, the terminals TA11, TA12 and the terminals TA29, TA30 corresponding to the outside of the receptacle KRE2 are all grounded (connected to the ground line). In addition to the terminals TA11, TA12, TA29, and TA30, the terminals TA25 and TA26 are grounded (connected to the ground line). A power supply voltage VSL2 of DC 34V is supplied to the terminals TA13 and TA14 of the receptacle KRE2. A power supply voltage VDD2 of DC 12V is supplied to the terminals TA15 to TA20 of the receptacle KRE2. A power supply voltage VCC2 of DC 5V is supplied to the terminals TA21 to TA24 of the receptacle KRE2. A power supply voltage VDD3 of DC 12V is supplied to the terminals TA27 and TA28 of the receptacle KRE2.

The power supply voltage VSL2 of DC 34V supplied from the power supply board 92 to the effect control board 12 via the power supply board wiring connected to the receptacle KRE2 for power supply board wiring is directly output from the effect control board 12 as the power supply voltage VSL. , And is supplied to the driver substrate 19 via the driver substrate wiring connected to the driver substrate wiring receptacle KRE3. For example, in the power supply board wiring receptacle KRE2, the terminals TA13 and TA14 supplied with the power supply voltage VSL2 are connected to the power supply line LSL, and the power supply line LSL is connected to a predetermined terminal in the driver board wiring receptacle KRE3. .. As shown in FIG. 4, the power supply board wiring receptacle KRE2 is provided adjacent to the driver board wiring receptacle KRE3, and the power supply line LSL does not approach the main electric circuits or electric parts in the production control board 12. It may be arranged so as to pass through the end portion of the substrate 12.

FIG. 12 shows a transmission path of the power supply voltage VSL. In the power supply board 92, the transformer circuit 501, the DC voltage generation circuit 502, and the like are used to generate a power supply voltage VSL2 of DC 34V from a commercial power supply that is an external power supply. For example, in the transformer circuit 501, a power supply voltage of 24 V AC is generated. The DC voltage generation circuit 502 includes a rectifier circuit and a smoothing circuit, and rectifies and smoothes a 24V AC power supply voltage to generate a 34V DC power supply voltage VSL2. Since the power supply voltage VSL2 of the direct current 34V is not subjected to voltage control such as feedback control, the power supply voltage VSL2 of the direct current 34V also changes due to the change of the power supply voltage of the alternating current 24V. As described above, the power supply voltage VSL2 of DC 34V supplied to the terminals TA13 and TA14 of the receptacle KRE2 is a DC voltage having a large fluctuation range (ripple component) for which voltage control is not performed. On the other hand, DC 12V power supply voltage VDD2 supplied to the terminals TA15 to TA20 of the receptacle KRE2, DC 5V power supply voltage VCC2 supplied to the terminals TA21 to TA24 of the receptacle KRE2, and terminals TA27 and TA28 of the receptacle KRE2 are supplied. The DC power supply voltage VDD3 of 12V is controlled by the feedback control in the power supply board 92, and may be a DC voltage having less fluctuation width (ripple component) than the power supply voltage VSL of 34V DC. ..

In the effect control board 12, the power supply line LSL corresponding to the power supply voltage VSL of DC 34V does not include a stabilizing circuit such as a filter circuit for stabilizing the voltage. On the other hand, in the driver board 19, the power supply voltage VSL of DC 34V is input to the filter circuit 511 to stabilize the voltage. In the effect control board 12, a power supply line corresponding to a power supply voltage different from the power supply voltage VSL of DC 34V has a stabilizing circuit for stabilizing the voltage by a filter circuit or the like.

For example, in the receptacle KRE2 for wiring the power supply substrate, the terminals TA15 to TA20 to which the power supply voltage VDD2 of DC 12V is supplied are connected to the filter circuit 131a, and the terminals TA21 to TA24 to which the power supply voltage VCC2 of DC 5V is supplied are the filters. The terminals TA27 and TA28, which are connected to the circuit 131b and to which the power supply voltage VDD3 of DC 12V is supplied, are connected to the filter circuit 131c. The output part of the filter circuit 131a is connected to the power supply line LDS that supplies the power supply voltage VDS of DC 12V, the output part of the filter circuit 131b is connected to the power supply line LCC that supplies the power supply voltage VCC of 5V DC, and the output part of the filter circuit 131c is connected. The output section is connected to a power supply line LDC that supplies a power supply voltage VDC of 12V DC. Thus, the filter circuit 131a is interposed between the terminals TA15 to TA20 of the receptacle KRE2 and the power supply line LDS corresponding to the power supply voltage VDS of DC 12V, and the filter circuit 131b is connected to the terminals TA21 to TA24 of the receptacle KRE2 and the power supply voltage of DC 5V. The filter circuit 131c is interposed between the power supply line LCC corresponding to VCC and the terminals TA27 and TA28 of the receptacle KRE2 and the power supply line LDC corresponding to the power supply voltage VDC of 12V DC.

The power supply line LSL is provided to supply a power supply voltage VSL of DC 34V. The power supply line LDS is provided to supply a power supply voltage VDS of DC 12V. The power supply line LCC is provided to supply a power supply voltage VCC of DC 5V. The power supply line LDC is provided to supply a power supply voltage VDC of DC 12V. Therefore, the power supply line LSL in which the filter circuit is not provided is provided to supply a higher power supply voltage than any of the power supply lines LDS, LCC, and LDC in which the filter circuit is interposed.

The receptacle KRE2 has six terminals TA15 to TA20 supplied with a power supply voltage VDD2 of DC 12V, four terminals TA21 to TA24 supplied with a power supply voltage VCC2 of DC 5V, and two terminals supplied with a power supply voltage VDD3 of DC 12V. While the terminals TA27 and TA28 are provided, two terminals TA13 and TA14 to which the power supply voltage VSL2 of DC 34V is supplied are provided. Therefore, in the receptacle KRE2, among the terminals to which the power supply voltage is supplied, the number of terminals TA15 to TA20, TA21 to TA24, TA27, and TA28 connected to the filter circuit is equal to that of the terminal TA13 not connected to the filter circuit. It is larger than the number of terminals of TA14. The number of terminals corresponding to each power supply voltage may be set according to the power supply capacity and the load current.

In the receptacle KRE2, the terminals TA15 to TA20 are supplied with a DC 12V power supply voltage VDD2, the terminals TA21 to TA24 are supplied with a DC 5V power supply voltage VCC2, and the terminals TA27 and TA28 are supplied with a DC 12V power supply voltage VDD3. Then, the power supply voltage VSL2 of DC 34V is supplied to the terminals TA13 and TA14. A filter circuit 131a is interposed between the terminals TA15 to TA20 of the receptacle KRE2 and the power supply line LDS supplying the power supply voltage VDS of DC 12V, and the terminals TA21 to TA24 of the receptacle KRE2 and the power supply voltage VCC of DC 5V are supplied. The filter circuit 131b is interposed between the power supply line LCC and the power supply line LCC, and the filter circuit 131c is interposed between the terminals TA27 and TA28 of the receptacle KRE2 and the power supply line LDC that supplies the power supply voltage VDC of 12V. On the other hand, no filter circuit is interposed between the terminals TA13 and TA14 of the receptacle KRE2 and the power supply line LSL which supplies the power supply voltage VSL of DC 34V. As described above, the power supply lines LDS, LCC, and LDC having the filter circuit can supply a plurality of kinds of power supply voltages such as DC 12V or DC 5V, and the power supply line LSL without the filter circuit has one type DC 34V. The power supply voltage can be supplied. In the receptacle KRE2, the terminals TA13 and TA14 are arranged outside the terminals TA15 to TA24 and the like. Alternatively, in the receptacle KRE2, of the terminals TA15 to TA24, TA27, and TA28, for example, terminals TA15 to TA24, which are arranged inside the terminals TA13 and TA14, are included.

In the receptacle KRE2, the terminals TA13 to TA24, TA27 and TA28 are arranged between the terminals TA11 and TA12 and the terminals TA29 and TA30. The terminals TA13 to TA24, TA27, and TA28 are terminals to which power supply voltage is supplied, and are power supply voltage terminals connected to various power supply voltages. On the other hand, the terminals TA11 and TA12 and the terminals TA29 and TA30 are terminals to which the power supply voltage is not supplied and are ground terminals connected to the ground voltage. Therefore, in the receptacle KRE2, the terminals TA13 to TA24, TA27, and TA28, which are power supply voltage terminals, are arranged between the terminals TA11 and TA12, which are ground terminals, and the terminals TA29 and TA30.

In the receptacle KRE2, the terminals TA13 and TA14 and the terminals TA15 to TA24 are arranged between the terminals TA11 and TA12 and the terminals TA25 and TA26, and the terminals TA25 and TA26 and the terminals TA29 and TA30 are connected to each other. TA27 and TA28 are arranged. The terminals TA13 and TA14 are terminals to which the power supply voltage VSL2 of DC 34V is supplied, and are power supply voltage terminals connected to the power supply voltage VSL2. The terminals TA15 to TA20 are terminals to which the power supply voltage VDD2 of DC 12V is supplied, and are power supply voltage terminals connected to the power supply voltage VDD2. The terminals TA21 to TA24 are terminals to which the power supply voltage VCC2 of DC 5V is supplied, and are power supply voltage terminals connected to the power supply voltage VCC2. The terminals TA27 and TA28 are terminals to which the power supply voltage VDD3 of DC 12V is supplied, and are power supply voltage terminals connected to the power supply voltage VDD3. Therefore, terminals TA13 and TA14 as power supply voltage terminals connected to the power supply voltage VSL2 of DC 34V and terminals TA15 to TA24, TA27, TA28 as power supply voltage terminals connected to power supply voltages other than the power supply voltage VSL2 of DC 34V. The terminals TA15 to TA24, which are a part of the above, are arranged between the terminals TA11 and TA12 and the terminals TA25 and TA26, which are ground terminals. In addition, among the terminals TA15 to TA24, TA27, and TA28 as the power supply voltage terminals connected to the power supply voltage other than the power supply voltage VSL2 of the direct current 34V, the terminals TA27 and TA28 which are a part of the other terminals serve as ground terminals. It is arranged between TA25 and TA26 and terminals TA29 and TA30.

The DC 12V power supply voltage VDD3 supplied to the terminals TA27 and TA28 is used by the step-down converter circuit 132 to generate a DC 1.05V power supply voltage. The power supply voltage of 1.05 V DC is supplied to a specific microprocessor such as the graphics processor of the display control unit 123. Therefore, in the receptacle KRE2, among the terminals TA13 to TA24, TA27, and TA28 connected to the power supply voltage, the terminals TA13 and TA14 connected to the power supply voltage VSL2 of DC 34V having a relatively large fluctuation range (ripple component) are , TA27 and TA28 connected to a power supply voltage VDD3 of DC 12V used to generate a power supply voltage supplied to a specific microprocessor such as a graphics processor of the display control unit 123.

In the effect control board 12, a case where the power supply voltage VSL2 of 34 V DC is stabilized and then output as the power supply voltage VSL can be considered. However, installation of the circuit element for stabilizing the power supply voltage VSL2 of 34V DC, which is not directly used in the production control board 12, invites an increase in the number of parts and the board volume, and also an increase in power loss and manufacturing cost. In addition, the installation of special circuit elements may make it difficult to reuse or standardize the effect control board 12. Therefore, the power supply voltage VSL2 of DC 34V for which the voltage control is not performed is directly output from the effect control board 12 as the power supply voltage VSL, and is input to the filter circuit 511 by the driver board 19 to stabilize the voltage. As a result, an appropriate board configuration that prevents an increase in the number of components and the board volume, power loss, and an increase in manufacturing cost becomes possible. Further, it is possible to realize an appropriate board configuration in which the production control board 12 can be easily reused or shared. In addition, the power supply line LSL is arranged away from the main electric circuits and electric components in the effect control board 12, so that an appropriate board configuration for preventing the adverse effect of noise due to the DC voltage having a large fluctuation range (ripple component) is provided. It will be possible.

In the effect control board 12, a power supply line LSL that supplies a power supply voltage VSL of DC 34V, a power supply line LDS that supplies a power supply voltage VDS of DC 12V, a power supply line LCC that supplies a power supply voltage VCC of DC 5V, and a power supply of DC 12V. Compared to any of the power supply lines LDS that supply the voltage VDS, it supplies a direct current of 34 V, which is a high power supply voltage. Generally, a stabilizing circuit that stabilizes a high power supply voltage tends to have a larger volume and power loss of a circuit element than a stabilizing circuit that stabilizes a low power supply voltage, and the cost of the circuit element is high. It is easy to become a thing. Therefore, since there is no filter circuit in the power supply line LSL that supplies the power supply voltage VSL of DC 34V, which is a high power supply voltage, an appropriate board configuration that prevents an increase in board volume, power loss, and increase in manufacturing cost is possible. become.

In the receptacle KRE2, a power supply voltage VSL of 34V DC is supplied to the two terminals TA13 and TA14. On the other hand, in the receptacle KRE2, the power supply voltage VDD2 of DC 12V is supplied to the six terminals TA15 to TA20, the power supply voltage VCC2 of DC 5V is supplied to the four terminals TA21 to TA24, and the two terminals TA27 and TA28. Is supplied with a power supply voltage VDD3 of DC 12V. Therefore, in the effect control board 12, among the terminals to which the power supply voltage is supplied by the receptacle KRE2, the number of terminals TA15 to TA24, TA27, and TA28 connected to any of the filter circuits 131a to 131c is equal to the number of terminals of the filter circuit. This is larger than the number of terminals TA13 and TA14 that are not connected to. Since the number of terminals is set in this way, for example, an appropriate board that improves the degree of freedom in wiring design according to the application of the power supply voltage for which the voltage is stabilized in the effect control board 12, the power supply capacity, and the like. Allows configuration.

In the receptacle KRE2, among the terminals to which the power supply voltage is supplied, the terminals TA15 to TA24, TA27, and TA28, which are connected to any of the filter circuits 131a to 131c in the effect control board 12, have the power supply voltage VDD2 of DC 12V. It includes terminals TA15 to TA20 capable of supplying power, terminals TA21 to TA24 capable of supplying a power source voltage VCC2 of DC 5V, and terminals TA27 and TA28 capable of supplying a power source voltage VDD3 of DC 12V. On the other hand, in the receptacle KRE2, among the terminals to which the power supply voltage is supplied, the terminals TA13 and TA14 that are not connected to the filter circuit in the production control board 12 can supply the power supply voltage VSL2 of DC 34V, and other types. The power supply voltage of is not supplied. Therefore, the number of types of power supply voltage that can be supplied differs depending on whether the power supply line has the filter circuit or the power supply line that does not have the filter circuit. More specifically, the power supply line including the filter circuit can supply a plurality of types of power supply voltages such as a power supply voltage VDD2 of DC 12V, a power supply voltage VCC2 of DC 5V, and a power supply voltage VDD2 of DC 12V. The power supply line not intervening with can supply one kind of power supply voltage of 34V DC power supply voltage VSL. In this way, since the number of types of power supply voltage that can be supplied differs depending on the power supply line, the wiring design can be freely set according to the use of the power supply voltage for which the voltage is stabilized in the production control board 12, for example. An appropriate substrate configuration that improves the degree of flexibility is possible.

Further, the terminals TA13 and TA14 connected to the power supply line in which the filter circuit is not interposed are arranged outside the terminals TA15 to TA24 connected to the power supply line in which the filter circuit is interposed. With such terminal arrangement, for example, an appropriate board configuration that improves the degree of freedom in wiring design according to the use of the power supply voltage for which the voltage is stabilized in the production control board 12 is possible. In addition, it is possible to realize an appropriate board configuration that shortens the wiring length for outputting the power supply voltage VSL2 of DC 34V supplied to the terminals TA13 and TA14 as the power supply voltage VSL as it is to the driver board 19.

In the receptacle KRE2, the terminals TA13 to TA24, TA27, TA28 are power supply voltage terminals connected to various power supply voltages. On the other hand, in the receptacle KRE2, the terminals TA11, TA12 and the terminals TA29, TA30 are all ground terminals connected to the ground voltage. The terminals TA13 to TA24, TA27, TA28 are arranged between the terminals TA11, TA12 and the terminals TA29, TA30. By arranging the terminals in this way, it is possible to realize an appropriate board configuration that is not easily affected by noise. In addition, it is possible to shield the power supply voltage and form an appropriate substrate structure that prevents the generation of noise.

In the receptacle KRE2, the terminals TA15 to TA24, TA27, and TA28 are first power supply voltage terminals connected to a power supply voltage different from the power supply voltage VSL2 of DC 34V. On the other hand, in the receptacle KRE2, the terminals TA13 and TA14 are second power supply voltage terminals connected to the power supply voltage VSL2 of DC 34V. Further, in the receptacle KRE2, the terminals TA11 and TA12 are first ground terminals connected to the ground voltage, the terminals TA25 and TA26 are second ground terminals connected to the ground voltage, and the terminals TA29 and TA30 are connected to the ground voltage. It becomes the third ground terminal. In the receptacle KRE2, the terminals TA13 and TA14 included in the second power supply voltage terminal and the terminals TA15 to TA24 included in the first power supply voltage terminal are the terminals TA11 and TA12 included in the first ground terminal, and the second TA2. Terminals TA27 and TA28, which are arranged between the terminals TA25 and TA26 included in the ground terminal and included in the first power supply voltage terminal, are included in the terminals TA25 and TA26 included in the second ground terminal and the third ground terminal. It is arranged between terminals TA29 and TA30. By arranging the terminals in this way, it is possible to realize an appropriate board configuration that is not easily affected by noise. In particular, the terminals TA25 and TA26 included in the second ground terminal are included in the terminals TA13 and TA14 included in the second power supply voltage terminal, the terminals TA15 to TA24 included in the first power supply voltage terminal, and the first power supply voltage terminal. By arranging it between TA27 and TA28, it is possible to realize an appropriate substrate configuration that is less susceptible to noise. In addition, it is possible to efficiently shield the power supply voltage and further form an appropriate substrate structure that prevents the generation of noise. In addition, terminals TA13 and TA14 connected to a power supply voltage VSL2 of DC 34V are connected to a power supply voltage VDD3 of DC 12V used to generate a power supply voltage to be supplied to a specific microprocessor such as a graphics processor of the display control unit 123. Since it is arranged away from the TA 27 and TA 28 which are connected to each other, it is possible to realize an appropriate board configuration in which a specific microprocessor is not easily affected by noise.

In the production control board 12, the power supply voltage VDL is branched at the branch point DB1 from the power supply voltage VDD2 supplied at the terminals TA15 to TA20 of the receptacle KRE2. After the power supply voltage VDL is branched at the branch point DB1 as described above, the power supply voltage VDS is stabilized by the filter circuit 131a. The power supply voltage VDL is a DC 12V power supply voltage used to drive a specific electric component such as a specific LED included in the production LED 61. The power supply voltage VDS is a 12V DC power supply voltage that is supplied to the amplifier circuit 521 and is used to output an audio signal. In this way, the filter circuit 131a stabilizes the power supply voltage VDS after branching the one power supply voltage VDD2 into the power supply voltage VDL and the power supply voltage VDS. The effect control board 12 may be provided with an amplifier circuit 521 so that the audio signals supplied to the speakers 8L and 8R can be output.

FIG. 13A shows a relationship between wiring lengths of wirings for supplying the power supply voltage VDS. In the effect control board 12, the power supply line LDS for supplying the power supply voltage VDS to the amplifier circuit 521 includes a wire having a wire length LL1 from the branch point DB1 to the input part of the filter circuit 131a and an output part of the filter circuit 131a. The wiring having the wiring length LL2 to the input portion of the amplifier circuit 521 may be included. The wiring length and the circuit arrangement in the effect control board 12 may be adjusted so that the wiring length LL2 is shorter than the wiring length LL1. As described above, the wiring length LL2 from the filter circuit 131a to the amplifier circuit 521 is shorter than the wiring length LL1 from the branch point DB1 of the power supply voltage VDS to the filter circuit 131a. The amplifier circuit 521 and the filter circuit 131a are not limited to those installed on the production control board 12, and may be installed on the voice control board 13.

FIG. 13B shows a transmission path of the power supply voltage VDS when the amplifier circuit 521 and the filter circuit 131 a are installed on the voice control board 13. In the power supply board 92, the power supply voltage VDD2 of DC 12V is generated from the commercial power supply which is an external power supply by using the transformer circuit 501, the DC voltage generation circuit 502, and the like. The power supply voltage VDD2 of DC 12V is supplied to the terminals TA15 to TA20 in the receptacle KRE2 for wiring the power supply substrate. In the performance control board 12, after the power supply voltage VDL is branched at the branch point DB1 from the power supply voltage VDD2 supplied from the terminals TA15 to TA20 of the receptacle KRE2, the power supply voltage VDS is directly output from the performance control board 12 as the power supply voltage VDS. The audio control board 13 may be supplied via the audio control board wiring connected to the audio board wiring receptacle KRE4. For example, in the power supply board wiring receptacle KRE2, the terminals TA15 to TA20 supplied with the power supply voltage VDD2 are connected to the power supply line LDS, and the power supply line LDS is connected to a predetermined terminal in the voice control board wiring receptacle KRE4. Just do it. In the effect control board 12, the power supply line LDS corresponding to the power supply voltage VDS of DC 12V may not have a stabilizing circuit such as a filter circuit for stabilizing the voltage. On the other hand, in the voice control board 13, the power supply voltage VDS of DC 12V is input to the filter circuit 131a to stabilize the voltage. The power supply voltage VDS thus stabilized may be supplied to the amplifier circuit 521.

The voice control board 13 may be provided with a voice control IC 522, a voice data ROM 523, and the like. The voice control IC 522 executes signal processing for generating a voice or a sound effect in accordance with a command (sound number data or the like) output from the production control CPU 120 of the production control board 12. The voice data ROM 523 stores control data according to the sound number data. The control data according to the sound number data is a collection of data that shows the output mode of the sound or the sound effect in a predetermined period (for example, the variable display period of the decorative pattern) in time series. It should be noted that various configurations provided on the voice control board 13 may be configured to be provided on the effect control board 12, and the voice control board 13 may not be provided.

The amplifier circuit 521 capable of amplifying the audio signal generated by the audio control IC 522 and outputting the amplified audio signal to the speakers 8L and 8R has a sound quality such that the output audio signal is distorted when the power supply voltage fluctuates. May be adversely affected. Therefore, the DC 12V power supply voltage VDS is supplied to the amplifier circuit 521 after being stabilized by the filter circuit 131a. In the production control board 12, one power supply voltage VDD2 is branched into a power supply voltage VDL for driving a specific electric component and a power supply voltage VDS for supplying to the amplification circuit 521, and then the filter circuit 131a is used. The stabilized power supply voltage VDS is supplied to the amplifier circuit 521. In this manner, by supplying the power supply voltage VDS stabilized by using the filter circuit 131a to the amplifier circuit 521, it is possible to realize an appropriate substrate configuration that stably operates the amplifier circuit 521.

In the power supply line LDS corresponding to the power supply voltage VDS to be supplied to the amplifier circuit 521, the wiring length LL2 from the filter circuit 131a to the amplifier circuit 521 has a wiring length LL2 to the filter circuit 131a after the power supply voltage VDL is branched at the branch point DB1. It is shorter than the wiring length LL1 until input. As described above, by shortening the wiring length until the power supply voltage VDS stabilized by using the filter circuit 131a is supplied to the amplifier circuit 521, the influence of noise is reduced and the amplifier circuit 521 is operated stably. It is possible to configure various substrates.

In the effect control board 12, the power supply voltage VCL is branched from the power supply voltage VCC2 supplied at the terminals TA21 to TA24 of the receptacle KRE2. After the power supply voltage VCL is branched, the power supply voltage VCC is stabilized by the filter circuit 131b. The power supply voltage VCL is a DC 5V power supply voltage used to drive a specific electric component such as a specific motor included in the performance motor 60 or a specific LED included in the performance LED 61. The power supply voltage VCC is a DC 5V DC power supply used to drive a predetermined electric circuit such as the effect control CPU 120. In this way, the filter circuit 131b stabilizes the power supply voltage VDD after the one power supply voltage VCC2 is branched into the power supply voltage VCL and the power supply voltage VDD.

In the effect control board 12, after stabilizing the power supply voltage VDD3 supplied at the terminals TA27 and TA28 of the receptacle KRE2 by the filter circuit 131c, the power supply voltage VDC is branched so that it can be supplied. The power supply voltage VDC is a DC 12V power supply voltage used to monitor the occurrence of power failure. The power supply voltage VDD3 is input to the step-down converter circuit 132 after being stabilized by the filter circuit 131c. The step-down converter circuit 132 is a circuit that converts a 1-input 2-output DC voltage. The step-down converter circuit 132 shown in FIG. 11 receives a power supply voltage VDD3 of DC 12V, which is stabilized by the filter circuit 131c, and converts it into a power supply voltage of DC 1.05V and a power supply voltage of DC 3.3V. Output. The output section of the step-down converter circuit 132 is connected to a power supply line L10 that supplies a power supply voltage of DC 1.05V and a power supply line L33 that supplies a power supply voltage of DC 3.3V. The power supply voltage of 1.05 V DC is used to drive a predetermined electric circuit such as a graphics processor included in the display control unit 123. The power supply voltage of DC 3.3V is used to drive a predetermined electric circuit such as the ROM 121 or the image data memory included in the display control unit 123. The power supply voltage of DC 3.3V is also input to the regulator circuit 133. The regulator circuit 133 may be a linear stabilized power supply circuit such as a series regulator such as an LDO (Low Drop-Out) regulator, and the power supply voltage of DC 3.3V is input to the power supply voltage of DC 1.5V. Converted to and output. The output part of the regulator circuit 133 is connected to a power supply line L15 that supplies a power supply voltage of DC 1.5V. The power supply voltage of DC 1.5V is used to drive a predetermined electric circuit such as the RAM 122.

FIG. 14 shows a configuration example of the filter circuits 131a to 131c. FIG. 14A shows a configuration example of the filter circuit 131a corresponding to the power supply voltage VDS. FIG. 14B shows a configuration example of the filter circuit 131b corresponding to the power supply voltage VCC. FIG. 14C shows a configuration example of the filter circuit 131c corresponding to the power supply voltage VDC.

The filter circuit 131a illustrated in FIG. 14A may be configured using the three-terminal capacitor 85a, the bypass capacitors C10 and C11, and the electrolytic capacitor C1. The bypass capacitors C10 and C11 are electrical components for noise prevention that prevent high frequency noise compared to the electrolytic capacitor C1, and are also called decoupling capacitors. The electrolytic capacitor C1 is an electrical component for noise prevention that prevents low-frequency noise as compared with the bypass capacitors C10 and C11. The input terminal (IN) of the three-terminal capacitor 85a serves as an input portion of the filter circuit 131a, and the power supply voltage VDD2 of DC 12V is supplied. The output terminal (OUT) of the three-terminal capacitor 85a serves as an output section of the filter circuit 131a, and supplies the power supply voltage VDS of DC 12V whose voltage is stabilized. The ground terminal (GND) of the three-terminal capacitor 85a is grounded (connected to the ground line). A 0.1 μF bypass capacitor C10, a 47 μF bypass capacitor C11, and a 1000 μF electrolytic capacitor C1 are connected between the output terminal of the three-terminal capacitor 85a and the ground terminal.

The filter circuit 131b shown in FIG. 14B may be configured using the three-terminal capacitor 85b, the bypass capacitors C12 and C13, and the electrolytic capacitor C2. The bypass capacitors C12 and C13 are electrical components for noise prevention that prevent high frequency noise compared to the electrolytic capacitor C2. The electrolytic capacitor C2 is an electric component for noise prevention that prevents low-frequency noise, as compared with the bypass capacitors C12 and C13. The input terminal (IN) of the three-terminal capacitor 85b serves as an input section of the filter circuit 131b, and the power supply voltage VCC2 of DC 5V is supplied. The output terminal (OUT) of the three-terminal capacitor 85b serves as an output section of the filter circuit 131b, and supplies the power supply voltage VCC of DC 5V whose voltage is stabilized. The ground terminal (GND) of the three-terminal capacitor 85b is grounded (connected to the ground line). A 0.1 μF bypass capacitor C12, a 47 μF bypass capacitor C13, and a 1000 μF electrolytic capacitor C2 are connected between the output terminal of the three-terminal capacitor 85b and the ground terminal.

The filter circuit 131c shown in FIG. 14C may be configured using the three-terminal capacitor 85c, the bypass capacitor C14, and the electrolytic capacitor C3. The bypass capacitor C14 is an electric component for noise prevention that prevents high frequency noise compared to the electrolytic capacitor C3. The electrolytic capacitor C3 is an electric component for noise prevention that prevents low-frequency noise as compared with the bypass capacitor C14. The input terminal (IN) of the three-terminal capacitor 85c serves as an input portion of the filter circuit 131c, and the power supply voltage VDD3 of DC 12V is supplied. The output terminal (OUT) of the three-terminal capacitor 85c serves as an output section of the filter circuit 131c, and supplies the power supply voltage VDC of 12V DC, the voltage of which is stabilized. The ground terminal (GND) of the three-terminal capacitor 85c is grounded (connected to the ground line). A bypass capacitor C14 of 0.1 μF and an electrolytic capacitor C3 of 1000 μF are connected between the output terminal of the three-terminal capacitor 85c and the ground terminal.

The filter circuits 131a to 131c function as a stabilizing circuit that stabilizes the voltage of each power supply path. For example, the filter circuit 131a stabilizes the power supply voltage VDS of DC 12V supplied by the power supply line LDS. The filter circuit 131b stabilizes the power supply voltage VCC of DC 5V supplied by the power supply line LCC. The filter circuit 131c stabilizes the DC 12V power supply voltage supplied by the power supply line LDC. In addition to the filter circuits 131a to 131c, the effect control board 12 may be provided with a noise prevention circuit that prevents noise from occurring in various power supply voltages.

FIG. 15 shows a configuration example of a noise prevention circuit provided on the effect control board 12. FIG. 15A shows a configuration example of the noise prevention circuit 135a corresponding to the LED DC 12V (DC 12V) which is the power supply voltage VDL. FIG. 15B shows a configuration example of the noise prevention circuit 135b corresponding to the power supply voltage VCL of LED/motor DC 5V (DC 5V). FIG. 15C shows a configuration example of the noise prevention circuit 135c corresponding to the IC power supply voltage VCC of 5V (DC 5V) and the IC power supply voltage of 3.3V DC of 3.3V (DC 3.3V). ing.

A noise prevention circuit 135a shown in FIG. 15A is configured using a capacitor C20 and a resistor R20 connected in series, a capacitor C21 and a resistor R21 connected in series, and a capacitor C22 and a resistor R22 connected in series. If you have. All of these configurations may be connected to the power supply line LDL that supplies the power supply voltage VDL and the ground terminal (ground line) that supplies the ground voltage. Each of the capacitors C20, C21, C22 may be a bypass capacitor of 0.1 μF. The resistors R20, R21 and R22 may all have a resistance value of 22Ω.

The noise prevention circuit 135b illustrated in FIG. 15B may be formed using a capacitor C23 and a resistor R23 connected in series and a capacitor C24 and a resistor R24 connected in series. All of these configurations may be connected to the power supply line LCL that supplies the power supply voltage VCL and the ground terminal (ground line) that supplies the ground voltage. Both the capacitors C23 and C24 may be 0.1 μF bypass capacitors. The resistors R23 and R24 may have a resistance value of 22Ω.

The noise prevention circuit 135c illustrated in FIG. 15C may be formed using capacitors C25 to C28. The capacitor C25 may be connected to the power supply line LCC that supplies the power supply voltage VCC and the ground terminal (ground line) that supplies the ground voltage. Capacitors C26, C27, and C28 may all be connected to a power supply line L33 that supplies a power supply voltage of DC 3.3V and a ground terminal (ground line) that supplies a ground voltage. Each of the capacitors C25 to C28 may be a 0.1 μF bypass capacitor.

In the noise prevention circuit 135a shown in FIG. 15A, resistors R20, R21, R22 are used in addition to the capacitors C20, C21, C22. In the noise prevention circuit 135b shown in FIG. 15B, resistors R23 and R24 are used in addition to the capacitors C23 and C24. On the other hand, in the noise prevention circuit 135c shown in FIG. 15C, the capacitors C25 to C28 are used and the resistors are not used. As described above, in the noise prevention circuits 135a and 135b, the resistors R20, R21, R22 and the resistors R23, R24 are used as circuit elements different from the noise prevention circuit 135c.

The power supply voltage VDL stabilized by the noise prevention circuit 135a shown in FIG. 15A is used to drive a specific electric component such as a specific LED included in the production LED 61. The power supply line LDL supplies a power supply voltage VDL for driving a specific electric component such as a specific LED included in the production LED 61. The power supply voltage VCL stabilized by the noise prevention circuit 135b shown in FIG. 15B drives a specific electric component such as a specific motor included in the performance motor 60 or a specific LED included in the performance LED 61. It is used to The power supply line LCL supplies a power supply voltage VCL for driving a specific electric component such as a specific motor included in the performance motor 60 or a specific LED included in the performance LED 61. The power supply voltage VCC and the DC 3.3V power supply voltage stabilized by the noise prevention circuit 135c shown in FIG. It is used to drive an electric circuit including the control circuit. The power supply line LCC supplies a power supply voltage VCC for driving an electric circuit including a specific control circuit, such as the effect control CPU 120. The power supply line L33 supplies a DC 3.3V power supply voltage for driving an electric circuit including a specific control circuit such as the ROM 121 or the image data memory of the display control unit 123. As described above, in the noise prevention circuits 135a and 135b corresponding to the power supply voltage for driving a specific electric component such as a motor or an LED, noise prevention corresponding to the power supply voltage for driving a specific electric circuit such as a CPU or a ROM is performed. Resistors R20, R21, R22 and resistors R23, R24 are used as circuit elements different from the circuit 135c.

In a load circuit using a current-driven circuit element such as a specific motor included in the performance motor 60 or a specific LED included in the performance LED 61, an excessive rush current is generated due to a transient phenomenon of the load circuit. , The electric parts may be damaged. Therefore, in the noise prevention circuit 135a, the resistor R20 is connected in series to the capacitor C20, the resistor R21 is connected in series to the capacitor C21, and the resistor R22 is connected in series to the capacitor C22. In the noise prevention circuit 135b, the resistor R23 is connected in series to the capacitor C23, and the resistor R24 is connected in series to the capacitor C24. When the power supply voltage VDL is stable, the capacitors C20, C21, C22 are in the charged state and the resistors R20, R21, R22 are in the non-conductive state, so that the power loss can be prevented. When the power supply voltage VCL is stable, the capacitors C23 and C24 are in the charging state and the resistors R23 and R24 are in the non-conducting state, so that the power loss can be prevented. On the other hand, in the semiconductor integrated circuit such as the effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, or the image data memory of the display control unit 123, a voltage-driven circuit element such as a CMOS circuit is used, and the input impedance becomes relatively large. Therefore, inrush current due to the transient phenomenon of the circuit is unlikely to occur. Therefore, in the noise prevention circuit 135c, it is not necessary to use resistors while using the capacitors C25 to C28. In this way, by constructing a noise prevention circuit using different circuit elements according to the characteristics of the circuit or electric component to which the power supply voltage is to be supplied, it is possible to prevent an increase in the substrate volume and the manufacturing cost and to reduce the noise. An appropriate substrate configuration that prevents the occurrence can be achieved.

FIG. 16 shows a power supply monitoring circuit 140 that uses the power supply voltage VDC. In the effect control board 12, the power supply voltage VDC is used to monitor the occurrence of power failure. The power supply monitoring circuit 140 is a circuit that is configured by using, for example, a power failure monitoring reset module IC, and realizes a power supply monitoring unit that can output a power cut signal. For example, the power supply monitoring circuit 140 outputs an off state (high level) power cutoff signal when the power supply voltage VDC exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 10 V). On the other hand, when the period during which the power supply voltage VDC becomes equal to or lower than the predetermined value continues for the predetermined standby time or longer, the power-off signal in the ON state (low level) is output. The power-off signal output from the power monitoring circuit 140 is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

The power supply voltage VDC to be monitored for outputting the power supply disconnection signal is used to generate a power supply voltage of DC 1.05V, a power supply voltage of DC 3.3V, and a power supply voltage of DC 1.5V. The power supply voltage of 1.05 V DC is used to drive a predetermined electric circuit such as a graphics processor included in the display control unit 123. The power supply voltage of DC 3.3V is used to drive a predetermined electric circuit such as the ROM 121 or the image data memory included in the display control unit 123. The power supply voltage of DC 1.5V is used to drive a predetermined electric circuit such as the RAM 122. By monitoring the power supply voltage VDC used to generate the power supply voltage supplied to such an electric circuit, a power-off signal is output (turned on) before the operating state of the electric circuit becomes unstable. Therefore, malfunctions in various electric circuits can be prevented.

In the effect control board 12, the power supply voltage VDD3 supplied from the terminals TA27 and TA28 of the receptacle KRE2 is input to the step-down converter circuit 132 after being stabilized by the filter circuit 131c. The step-down converter circuit 132 uses the input voltage to generate a power supply voltage of direct current 1.05V and a power supply voltage of direct current 3.3V higher than direct current 1.05V. The power supply voltage of DC 3.3V is input to the regulator circuit 133. The regulator circuit 133 uses the input voltage to generate a power supply voltage of DC 1.5V. The power supply voltage of DC 1.5V is higher than 1.05V DC but lower than 3.3V DC. As described above, by using the step-down converter circuit 132 and the regulator circuit 133, the power supply voltage of DC 1.05V, the power supply voltage of DC 1.5V higher than DC 1.05V, and the DC voltage 3 higher than DC 1.5V. .3V power supply voltage can be generated, and the step-down converter circuit 132 outputs a DC 1.05V power supply voltage and a DC 3.3V power supply voltage, while the regulator circuit 133 outputs a DC 1.V. It outputs a power supply voltage of 5V.

After stabilizing the power supply voltage VDD3 by the filter circuit 131c, the branched DC 12V power supply voltage VDC is supplied to the power supply monitoring circuit 140 that monitors the occurrence of power failure. Therefore, the input voltage of the step-down converter circuit 132 is common with the power supply voltage VDC of 12V DC, and the input voltage of the step-down converter circuit 132 is the monitoring target of the power supply monitoring circuit 140. After branching power supply voltage VDC, a bypass capacitor having a predetermined capacity (for example, 47 μF) may be connected to the input side of step-down converter circuit 132.

Among the power supply voltages generated by using the step-down converter circuit 132 and the regulator circuit 133, the power supply voltage of DC 1.05V, which is the lowest voltage with the smallest voltage value, is a specific value such as a graphics processor of the display control unit 123. Supplied to the microprocessor. The power supply voltage of DC 1.05V is not limited to being supplied to the graphics processor of the display control unit 123, and may be supplied to, for example, the effect control CPU 120 or any other microprocessor.

Among the power supply voltages generated by using the step-down converter circuit 132 and the regulator circuit 133, the DC 3.3V power supply voltage having the highest voltage value and the high voltage is stored in, for example, the ROM 121 or the image data memory of the display control unit 123. Supplied. The ROM 121 only needs to be able to be activated before an electric component driven by a power supply voltage of DC 1.5V.

Among the power supply voltages generated by using the step-down converter circuit 132 and the regulator circuit 133, a power supply voltage of DC 1.5V higher than DC 1.05V and lower than DC 3.3V is supplied to the RAM 122, for example. The RAM 122 is a temporary storage memory that can be stored and read by a DDR (Double Data Rate) method, for example, and functions as a memory module such as SIMM (Single In-line Memory Module) or DIMM (Dual In-line Memory Module). Configure the substrate. The board forming the RAM 122 may be a separate board that is detachably connectable to the effect control board 12. In this case, the DC 1.5V power supply voltage is supplied to a board different from the effect control board 12.

When a 1-input/3-output step-down converter circuit is used instead of the step-down converter circuit 132 and the regulator circuit 133, a special dedicated circuit is required, which may increase the manufacturing cost. In addition, the amount of heat generated by a single circuit may increase, and the electric circuit may be damaged. Therefore, in the step-down converter circuit 132, the power supply voltage VDD3 stabilized by the filter circuit 131c (the same applies to the power supply voltage VDC) is input, and the power supply voltage of DC 1.05 V and the power supply voltage of DC 3.3 V are output. .. The regulator circuit 133 receives a power supply voltage of DC 3.3V and outputs a power supply voltage of DC 1.5V. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in manufacturing cost and to realize an appropriate substrate configuration that disperses heat generated in the electric circuit.

A power supply voltage VDC that is the same as or substantially the same as the voltage supplied to the step-down converter circuit 132 is supplied to the power supply monitoring circuit 140, and the occurrence of power failure is monitored. In this way, the power supply voltage VDC used to generate various power supply voltages by the step-down converter circuit 132 and the regulator circuit 133 is set as the monitoring target of the power supply monitoring circuit 140. Before the operating state of the electric circuit, which is important for executing the effect in (1), becomes unstable, an appropriate board configuration for detecting the occurrence of power failure can be realized.

The power supply voltage of 1.05 V DC output from the step-down converter circuit 132 is supplied to a specific microprocessor such as the graphics processor of the display control unit 123. By outputting the power supply voltage of 1.05V DC from the step-down converter circuit 132, when the power is cut off, the power supply voltage of 1.05V DC is output until a longer time than the configuration output from the regulator circuit 133 elapses. Can be maintained. Thereby, when the power is cut off, an appropriate board configuration, such as a graphics processor of the display control unit 123, for continuing the operation of an electric circuit important for executing the effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as much as possible is provided. It will be possible.

The DC 3.3V power supply voltage output from the step-down converter circuit 132 is supplied to, for example, the ROM 121, and is activated before an electric component such as the RAM 122 driven by the DC 1.5V power supply voltage output from the regulator circuit 133. It will be possible. As a result, when the power is turned on, for example, an appropriate board configuration that allows the effect control CPU 120 to immediately read the stored data in the ROM 121 becomes possible.

The power supply voltage of DC 1.5 V output from the regulator circuit 133 may be supplied to a component configured as a substrate different from the effect control substrate 12, such as the RAM 122. In this manner, by causing the regulator circuit 133 different from the step-down converter circuit 132 to output the power supply voltage of DC 1.5V supplied to the board different from the effect control board 12, it is possible to prevent the manufacturing cost from increasing. An appropriate substrate configuration that disperses the heat generated in the electric circuit becomes possible.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 30AK)
FIG. 17 shows a configuration example of a portion in which a wiring pattern connecting the CPU 103 and the RAM 102 is formed on one substrate surface (front surface) of the main substrate 11 regarding the characteristic portion 30AK of the present embodiment. On the main board 11, a wiring pattern forming a plurality of signal wirings is formed in order to connect a plurality of electric components such as the RAM 102 and the CPU 103 by a plurality of signal wirings. The CPU 103 is an electric component configured to be able to execute a predetermined process regarding game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the RAM 102 is an electrical component configured to be able to store information related to the execution of the process by the CPU 103.

One or a plurality of ground conductors are arranged in the periphery of the wiring patterns forming the plurality of signal wirings or in the area between the signal wirings. The ground conductor functions as a reference ground and a characteristic impedance adjusting ground, and is maintained at the ground voltage. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 17, as the plurality of ground conductors, the ground conductors 30AK10G and 30AK11G are arranged in a region around the plurality of signal wirings, and the ground conductor 30AK20G is arranged in a region between the plurality of signal wirings. .. As described above, one or a plurality of ground conductors may be provided in a blank area which is a blank area in which the wiring patterns forming the plurality of signal wirings are not provided. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent or suppress electromagnetic interference due to electromagnetic noise emitted from a plurality of signal wirings and electromagnetic noise between signal wirings.

Note that the plurality of ground conductors are not limited to being arranged in both areas around the signal wirings and between the signal wirings, and the ground conductors are provided only in one area around the plurality of signal wirings or between the signal wirings. It may be arranged. Alternatively, such a ground conductor may not be arranged.

FIG. 18 shows regions and sections for explaining the wiring pattern forming the plurality of signal wirings shown in FIG. 17 in more detail. A region 30AK01R shown in FIG. 18 is a region at the end on the side where a plurality of signal wirings are connected to the CPU 103. The region 30AK10R shown in FIG. 18 is a region in which a plurality of signal wirings are all linear or substantially linear and are parallel or substantially parallel to each other, and the region 30AK11R and the region 30AK12R shown in FIG. This is a region in which the signal wiring of the part has a second shape that is different from the linear shape and the substantially linear shape and is not parallel or substantially parallel to the other signal wiring. In the section 30AK0SC shown in FIG. 18, a short distance pattern in which some of the plurality of signal wirings are connected at the shortest distance or the shortest distance and a signal wiring not included in the short distance pattern are longer than the short distance pattern. And long-distance patterns to be connected with are arranged.

FIG. 19 is an enlarged view of the area 30AK01R shown in FIG. In the region 30AK01R shown in FIG. 19, the wiring patterns forming the plurality of signal wirings include patterns 30AK10D to 30AK13D, patterns 30AK10CK, patterns 30AK10CS, patterns 30AK10RS, and patterns 30AK10A to 30AK14A.

FIG. 20 shows a setting example of the signal type, the presence/absence of signal synchronization, and the presence/absence of a meandering shape, corresponding to the wiring pattern shown in FIG. The signal type shown in FIG. 20 indicates the content (use) of the electric signal transmitted by the signal wiring formed by the pattern of each wiring. The signal synchronization shown in FIG. 20 indicates whether or not there is synchronization with an electric signal transmitted through another signal wiring. The meandering shape shown in FIG. 20 indicates whether or not the pattern of each wiring connecting between the RAM 102 and the CPU 103 is provided with a portion having a meandering shape different from the linear shape and the substantially linear shape. The meandering shape is also referred to as a meander shape, a zigzag shape, or a folded shape, and by repeatedly bending the signal wiring with respect to the extending direction of the signal wiring in a predetermined section, for example, in a direction orthogonal or substantially orthogonal to the extending direction. Any shape may be used as long as it is folded back and forth.

In the setting example shown in FIG. 20, each of the wiring patterns 30AK10D to 30AK13D constitutes a signal wiring for transmitting a data signal. The data signal transmitted through each signal wiring is transmitted in synchronization with a signal transmitted through another signal wiring such as a clock signal and a data signal transmitted through another signal wiring. The wiring pattern 30AK10CK constitutes a signal wiring for transmitting a clock signal. The clock signal is transmitted in synchronization with signals transmitted through other signal lines, such as data signals, address signals, and chip select signals. The wiring pattern 30AK10CS constitutes a signal wiring for transmitting a chip select signal. The chip select signal is transmitted in synchronization with a signal such as a clock signal transmitted through another signal line. The wiring pattern 30AK10RS constitutes a signal wiring for transmitting a reset signal. The reset signal is transmitted asynchronously with the signal transmitted through the other signal wiring. Each of the wiring patterns 30AK10A to 30AK14A constitutes a signal wiring for transmitting an address signal. The address signal transmitted through each signal wiring is transmitted in synchronization with a signal transmitted through another signal wiring such as a clock signal and an address signal transmitted through another signal wiring.

The wiring patterns 30AK10D to 30AK13D that form the signal wiring for transmitting the data signal among the data signal, the clock signal, the chip select signal, and the address signal that are transmitted in synchronization with the signal transmitted by the other signal wiring A wiring pattern 30AK10D having no meandering shape is included. At least a part of the wiring pattern forming the signal wiring for transmitting the data signal, the clock signal, the chip select signal, and the address signal different from the data signal transmitted by the signal wiring formed by the wiring pattern 30AK10D has a linear shape. And has a meandering shape as a shape different from the substantially linear shape.

The signal wiring for transmitting the data signal formed by the wiring pattern 30AK10D is between the connection terminals in the RAM 102 and the CPU 103 as compared with the signal wiring for transmitting the other data signal, the clock signal, the chip select signal, and the address signal. The distance is getting longer. Therefore, at least a part of the wiring pattern constituting the signal wiring for transmitting the data signal, the clock signal, the chip select signal, and the address signal different from the data signal transmitted by the signal wiring formed by the wiring pattern 30AK10D is formed. Due to the meandering shape, the wiring length of each signal wiring becomes the same or substantially the same. On the other hand, the wiring pattern 30AK10D does not need to have a meandering shape.

As described above, among the signal wirings for transmitting the synchronization signal, the signal wirings in which the distance between the connection terminals in the plurality of electric components is longer than the distance between the other connection terminals is, for example, a wiring portion having a meandering shape. The wiring pattern may be formed so as not to include a wiring portion having a shape different from the linear shape and the substantially linear shape. Conversely speaking, the signal wiring formed by the wiring pattern that has a linear shape or a substantially linear shape but does not include a linear shape such as a meandering shape and a shape different from the substantially linear shape has a meandering shape. The distance between the connection terminals of the plurality of electric components is longer than that of the signal wiring formed by the wiring pattern including a straight line shape and a shape different from the substantially straight line shape. Alternatively, among the signal wirings for transmitting the synchronization signal, the signal wirings in which the distance between the connection terminals in the plurality of electric components is longer than the distance between the other connection terminals is, for example, a wiring portion having a meandering shape. The wiring pattern may be formed so as not to include a wiring portion having a shape different from the shape parallel and substantially parallel to the signal wiring. Conversely, the signal wiring formed by the wiring pattern that is parallel or substantially parallel to the other signal wiring but does not include a shape different from the parallel and substantially parallel shapes such as the meandering shape is the meandering shape. The distance between the connection terminals of the plurality of electric components is longer than that of the signal wiring formed by the wiring pattern including the shape different from the shape parallel and substantially parallel to the other signal wiring. This makes it possible to prevent or suppress the occurrence of delay time differences (skew) between the signals transmitted by the plurality of signal wirings by making the wiring lengths of the signal wirings the same or substantially the same. By reducing the delay time difference between the signals transmitted through the plurality of signal wirings, the reliability of the signals transmitted through the plurality of signal wirings can be improved.

The wiring pattern 30AK10RS is not provided with a meandering shape. The wiring pattern 30AK10RS constitutes a signal wiring for transmitting a reset signal which is an asynchronous signal. When transmitting an asynchronous signal such as a reset signal, it is not necessary to consider a delay time difference from a signal transmitted through another signal wiring. Therefore, unlike the wiring pattern 30AK10RS forming the signal wiring for transmitting the reset signal, the wiring pattern forming the signal wiring for transmitting the asynchronous signal does not have a meandering shape. If the meandering shape is not provided in the wiring pattern, an increase in the area of the substrate on which the wiring pattern is arranged can be suppressed, and the size of the substrate can be reduced.

As a wiring pattern having no meandering shape, a wiring pattern forming a dummy wiring maintained at the ground voltage may be arranged. For example, in the signal wiring formed by the wiring pattern 30AK10RS, the reset voltage may be transmitted and the ground voltage may be maintained. The wiring pattern 30AK10RS includes wiring patterns 30AK10D to 30AK13D that form a signal wiring for transmitting a data signal, wiring patterns 30AK10CK that forms a signal wiring for transmitting a clock signal, and a chip select signal. It is arranged between a group of patterns composed of wiring patterns 30AK10CS forming the signal wiring and a group of patterns composed of wiring patterns 30AK10A to 30AK14A forming the signal wiring for transmitting an address signal. There is. By using a signal wiring arranged between other signal wirings, such as the wiring pattern 30AK10RS, as a dummy wiring maintained at the ground voltage, it is possible to prevent or suppress electromagnetic interference due to electromagnetic noise in a plurality of signal wirings. .. As a wiring pattern having no meandering shape, a wiring pattern maintained at the power supply voltage may be arranged instead of the dummy wiring maintained at the ground voltage or together with the dummy wiring maintained at the ground voltage. For example, in the signal wiring formed by the wiring pattern 30AK10RS, the reset signal may be maintained instead of being transmitted at the power supply voltage. If the wiring pattern maintained at the power supply voltage is arranged close to the wiring patterns forming other signal wirings, electromagnetic noise may occur due to electromagnetic coupling between the respective signal wirings. Therefore, when arranging the wiring pattern that is maintained at the power supply voltage, the distance from the signal wiring is set to be longer than that when arranging the wiring pattern that is maintained at the ground voltage. A pattern may be formed. As a result, it is possible to prevent or suppress electromagnetic interference due to electromagnetic noise in the signal wiring.

FIG. 21 is an enlarged view of the region 30AK10R shown in FIG. Wiring patterns 30AK10CK, 30AK10CS, 30AK10RS, and 30AK10A to 14A are formed in the region 30AK10R. These wiring patterns are formed in the region 30AK10R such that the plurality of signal wirings are all linear or substantially linear and parallel or substantially parallel to each other. In this manner, in the region 30AK10R, the wiring patterns forming the plurality of signal wirings are all formed to have a linear shape or a substantially linear shape, and the plurality of signal wirings have a shape parallel or substantially parallel to each other. A wiring pattern is formed.

FIG. 22 is an enlarged view of the region 30AK11R shown in FIG. Similar to the region 30AK10R, wiring patterns 30AK10CK, 30AK10CS, 30AK10RS, and 30AK10A to 14A are formed in the region 30AK11R. In the region 30AK11R, these wiring patterns are formed so that at least one signal wiring has a linear shape or a substantially linear shape, while other signal wirings have a shape different from the linear shape and the substantially linear shape. Is formed. In a region 30AK11R shown in FIG. 22, for example, a wiring pattern 30AK10CK forming a signal wiring for transmitting a clock signal and a wiring pattern 30AK10CS forming a signal wiring for transmitting a chip select signal have a plurality of bent portions. Although included, each is formed to have a linear shape or a substantially linear shape. In the region 30AK11R shown in FIG. 22, the wiring pattern 30AK10RS forming the signal wiring for transmitting the reset signal is formed to have a linear shape or a substantially linear shape that does not include a bent portion. On the other hand, in the region 30AK11R shown in FIG. 22, the wiring patterns 30AK10A to 30AK14A forming the signal wiring for transmitting the address signal have a meandering shape formed by a plurality of bent portions, and have a linear shape and a substantially linear shape. Are formed to have different shapes.

In the portion where the meandering shape is formed, the signal wiring may be bent in a direction orthogonal to the original extending direction by, for example, interposing a plurality of bent portions. In each of the bent portions, the signal wiring may be bent so as to form an angle (obtuse angle) larger than a right angle to form a wiring pattern in which the extending direction of the signal wiring is changed. In this case, the signal wiring is bent such that the bending amount at each bent portion is smaller than the right angle. In the portion where the meandering shape is formed, the signal wiring can be extended in the first extending direction and the second extending direction which is orthogonal or substantially orthogonal to the first extending direction, and the first extending direction is provided. A plurality of bent portions may be provided between the wiring pattern forming the signal wiring in the direction and the wiring pattern forming the signal wiring in the second extending direction. In this way, the extending direction of the signal wiring is changed through the plurality of bent portions in which the bending amount of the signal wiring is smaller than the predetermined angle. By reducing the amount of bending, the pattern width of the wiring at the bent portion is prevented from changing significantly, the characteristic impedance of the transmission line is prevented from changing suddenly, and electromagnetic waves caused by electromagnetic noise in multiple signal wirings are prevented. Interference is prevented or suppressed.

In each signal wiring, a plurality of bent portions may be arranged so that the position of the bent portion is a distance longer than a predetermined length from the position of the bent portion in the other signal wiring. The predetermined length may be a predetermined length from the viewpoint of board design, such as a fixed length included in the range of 2 mm to 5 mm. At the bent portion of the signal wiring, electromagnetic noise is likely to occur due to changes in characteristic impedance and the like. The bent portion formed by the wiring pattern forming one signal wiring included in the plurality of signal wirings is close to the bent portion formed by the wiring pattern forming another signal wiring included in the plurality of signal wirings. When arranged, the signal transmitted through each signal wiring may be easily affected by electromagnetic noise. Therefore, a bent portion formed by a wiring pattern forming one signal wiring included in the plurality of signal wirings and a bent portion formed by a wiring pattern forming another signal wiring included in the plurality of signal wirings are formed. The electromagnetic interference due to the electromagnetic noise in the plurality of signal wirings can be prevented or suppressed by arranging the plurality of signal wirings at intervals such that the distance is longer than the predetermined length.

In the region 30AK11R, at least one signal wiring is formed to have a shape different from parallel and substantially parallel. In the region 30AK11R shown in FIG. 22, for example, a wiring pattern 30AK10CK that forms a signal wiring for transmitting a clock signal and a wiring pattern 30AK10CS that forms a signal wiring for transmitting a chip select signal each have a plurality of patterns. The signal wirings are formed so as to have a parallel or substantially parallel shape as a whole through the bent portion. On the other hand, in the region 30AK11R shown in FIG. 22, the wiring patterns 30AK10A to 30AK14A that form the signal wiring for transmitting the address signal are formed in a meandering shape by a plurality of bent portions, so that they are mutually formed as a whole. The signal wiring is formed to have a shape different from parallel or substantially parallel.

In the region 30AK11R shown in FIG. 22, at least one signal wiring of the plurality of signal wirings has a meandering shape or the like different from the parallel and substantially parallel shapes. In this region 30AK11R, in the space region 30AK0SP adjacent to the pattern of the wiring forming the signal wiring, at least a conductor is not provided on the same substrate as the signal wiring. The space region 30AK0SP is, for example, close to the wiring patterns 30AK10A to 30AK13A in which the meandering shape is provided in the region 30AK11R among the wiring patterns 30AK10A to 30AK14A forming the signal wiring for transmitting the address signal. Since no conductor is provided in the space region 30AK0SP, it is possible to prevent or suppress electromagnetic interference due to electromagnetic noise in a plurality of signal wirings. When a conductor is provided in the area close to the meandering wiring pattern, electromagnetic waves may be emitted from the signal wiring, and electromagnetic noise may occur due to electromagnetic coupling between the signal wiring and the conductor. May occur. Therefore, the conductor is not provided in a region close to the wiring pattern provided with the meandering shape, such as the space region 30AK0SP, thereby preventing or suppressing electromagnetic interference due to electromagnetic noise in a plurality of signal wirings. To be

FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view showing a configuration example of the main board 11 formed as a multilayer wiring board. The main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 23 has a multi-layer structure formed by stacking synthetic resins, and various wiring patterns can be formed on the surface of each layer or the inner layer. A plurality of electronic components such as the RAM 102 and the CPU 103 are electrically connected via the wiring pattern formed on the main substrate 11 having such a multilayer structure. The multilayer structure of the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 23 includes a surface layer 30AK1S, a ground layer 30AK1L, a power supply layer 30AK2L, a wiring layer 30AK3L, a power supply layer 30AK4L, and a back surface layer 30AK2S.

A surface layer 30AK1S is provided on the surface of the main substrate 11 that is one of the substrate surfaces, and wiring patterns 30AK10P and patterns 30AK11P that form the signal wiring are formed. A back surface layer 30AK2S is provided on the back surface that is the other board surface of the main board 11, and wiring patterns 30AK20P that form signal wirings are formed. The wiring pattern 30AK10P formed on the surface layer 30AK1S of the main substrate 11 is connected to the wiring pattern 30AK20P formed on the back surface layer 30AK2S through the through hole 30AK1H penetrating the surface layer 30AK1S and the back surface layer 30AK2S of the main substrate 11. It is electrically connected. The wiring pattern 30AK11P formed on the surface layer 30AK1S of the main board 11 is connected to the wiring pattern 30AK20P formed on the back surface layer 30AK2S via the through holes 30AK2H penetrating the surface layer 30AK1S and the back surface layer 30AK2S of the main board 11. It is electrically connected. In this way, the main substrate 11 is provided with the wiring patterns 30AK10P and 30AK11P that form the signal wiring in the surface layer 30AK1S provided on the surface serving as one substrate surface, and the back surface serving as the other substrate surface. The back surface layer 30AK2S is provided with through holes 30AK1H and through holes 30AK2H capable of being electrically connected to the wiring patterns 30AK20P forming the signal wiring.

The wiring lengths of the signal wirings included in the plurality of signal wirings that connect the RAM 102 and the CPU 103 shown in FIG. 23 are as follows: Not only the wiring length of the signal wiring formed by the pattern 30AK20P but also the lengths of the through holes 30AK1H and 30AK2H are the same or substantially the same. In the main substrate 11 having the multilayer structure shown in FIG. 23, the signal lengths of the signal wirings including the lengths of the through holes 30AK1H and the through holes 30AK2H are set to be the same or substantially the same, and signals transmitted by a plurality of signal wirings are It is possible to prevent or suppress the occurrence of a delay time difference. By reducing the delay time difference of the signals transmitted by the plurality of signal wirings in the multilayer wiring board such as the main substrate 11, the reliability of the signals transmitted by the plurality of signal wirings can be improved.

In the main substrate 11 having the multilayer structure shown in FIG. 23, a ground layer 30AK1L is provided as a conductor layer adjacent to the surface layer 30AK1S. One or more ground conductors are arranged on the ground layer 30AK1L, and the ground conductors are maintained at the ground voltage. In at least one of the patterns 30AK10P and 30AK11P of the wirings forming the signal wiring in the surface layer 30AK1S, a plurality of signal wirings are parallel and substantially parallel in at least one of the patterns, which is different from the linear shape and the substantially linear shape such as the meandering shape. It may be formed so as to include a region having a shape different from the above shape. No signal is transmitted in the ground layer 30AK1L as a conductor layer adjacent to the surface layer 30AK1S. Since signals are not transmitted in the conductor layer adjacent to the surface layer 30AK1S on which the wiring patterns 30AK10P and 30AK11P are formed, the signals transmitted by the plurality of signal wirings formed by the wiring patterns 30AK10P and 30AK11P are electromagnetic waves. It becomes difficult to be affected by noise, and the influence of electromagnetic noise on other signal wirings can be prevented or suppressed.

In the back surface layer 30AK2S of the main substrate 11 having the multilayer structure shown in FIG. 23, a wiring pattern 30AK20P that constitutes a signal wiring has a shape different from a linear shape and a substantially linear shape, such as a meandering shape, and a plurality of signal wirings are parallel and substantially parallel. It may be formed to include a region having a shape different from the parallel shape. No signal is transmitted in the power supply layer 30AK4L as a conductor layer adjacent to the back surface layer 30AK2S. One or more power supply conductors are arranged on the power supply layer 30AK4L, and the power supply conductors are maintained at the power supply voltage. Since signals are not transmitted in the conductor layer adjacent to the back surface layer 30AK2S on which the wiring pattern 30AK20P is formed, signals transmitted by a plurality of signal wirings configured by the wiring pattern 30AK20P are less susceptible to electromagnetic noise. Therefore, it is possible to prevent or suppress the influence of electromagnetic noise on other signal wirings. In a multilayer wiring board such as the main board 11, since no signal is transmitted in a conductor layer adjacent to a layer in which a plurality of signal wirings are provided, prevention or suppression of electromagnetic interference due to electromagnetic noise in the plurality of signal wirings Is planned.

In the wiring layer 30AK3L of the main substrate 11 having the multi-layer structure shown in FIG. 23, the wiring pattern forming the signal wiring has a shape different from a linear shape and a substantially linear shape such as a meandering shape, and a plurality of signal wirings are parallel and substantially parallel. It may be formed so as to include a region having a shape different from this shape. No signal is transmitted in the power supply layer 30AK2L or the power supply layer 30AK4L as the conductor layer adjacent to the wiring layer 30AK3L. In a multilayer wiring board such as the main board 11, a conductor layer adjacent to the wiring layer 30AK3L in which a plurality of signal wirings are provided does not transmit a signal, so that electromagnetic interference due to electromagnetic noise in the plurality of signal wirings is prevented or Suppression is achieved. However, in the case where the wiring layer 30AK3L, which is an inner conductor layer provided on the multilayer wiring board, is formed so that the pattern of the wirings forming the signal wiring includes a region having a meandering shape or the like, When a failure such as disconnection occurs, it may be difficult to confirm the state of the signal wiring in the wiring layer 30AK3L from the outside of the substrate. On the other hand, areas such as the front surface layer 30AK1S and the back surface layer 30AK2S of the main substrate 11 in which the wiring pattern forming the signal wiring has a meandering shape or the like on one substrate surface or the other substrate surface of the main substrate 11 are provided. In the case where it is formed so as to include, it becomes possible to form an appropriate board configuration in which it is easy to confirm the state of the signal wiring in the front surface layer 30AK1S or the back surface layer 30AK2S from the outside of the board when a failure occurs due to disconnection of the signal wiring. Become.

The through holes penetrating the front surface layer 30AK1S and the back surface layer 30AK2S of the main substrate 11 are not limited to the through holes 30AK1H and the through holes 30AK2H shown in FIG. 23, and more through holes are provided and signals in a plurality of signal wirings are provided. It may be used to make the wiring lengths the same or substantially the same. In the wiring patterns forming the plurality of signal wirings, the signal wirings are arranged only in the surface layer 30AK1S of the main board 11 without interposing through holes such as the through holes 30AK1H and 30AK2H. The formed pattern may be included. The signal wiring such as the signal wiring for transmitting the data signal configured by the wiring pattern 30AK10D, in which the distance between the connection terminals of the plurality of electric components is longer than the distance between the other connection terminals, the through hole 30AK1H and the through hole The signal wiring may be arranged only in the surface layer 30AK1S of the main substrate 11 without passing through a through hole such as the hole 30AK2H. Conversely speaking, the signal wiring formed by the wiring pattern formed in one conductor layer such as the front surface layer 30AK1S without the interposition of the through holes includes the through holes in the plurality of conductor layers such as the front surface layer 30AK1S and the back surface layer 30AK2S. The distance between the connection terminals of the plurality of electric components is longer than that of the signal wiring formed by the wiring pattern formed so as to be electrically connectable via the.

When a plurality of signal wirings are provided adjacent to each other, a small blank area is formed like the space area 30AK0SP shown in FIG. It is also conceivable to provide a through hole in this blank area and to have a through hole electrode in which a conductive material such as copper is embedded so as to be electrically connected to another conductor layer such as the ground layer 30AK1L. In a configuration in which a conductor such as a through-hole electrode is provided in the blank area, a large number of through-hole electrodes may be arranged in order to stabilize the electric field distribution in the blank area, for example. In this case, not only the front surface layer 30AK1S of the main substrate 11 but also the back surface layer 30AK2S are provided with structures corresponding to through-hole electrodes such as bumps, which restricts the design of the wiring pattern on the substrate. Inconvenience may occur. In addition, in the ground layer 30AK1L and the power supply layers 30AK2L, 30AK4L, which are inner conductor layers provided on the multilayer wiring board, when the through-hole electrode is provided, the conductor layer pattern is removed around the through-hole electrode. As a result, the pattern in the inner conductor layer such as the ground layer 30AK1L, the power supply layers 30AK2L, and 30AK4L may be divided, and it may be difficult to design the pattern in the conductor layer. Further, in place of the through-hole electrode, a conductor such as a dummy pad is provided in a blank area and is not connected to other conductor layers, the conductor is affected by electromagnetic noise from the outside, This conductor may affect the plurality of signal wirings by electromagnetic noise, which may cause adverse effects such as electromagnetic interference. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent or suppress the occurrence of these inconveniences due to the fact that the conductor is not provided in the space region 30AK0SP that is close to the wiring pattern forming the signal wiring.

Other than the space region 30AK0SP shown in FIG. 22, a blank region formed when a plurality of signal wirings are provided adjacent to each other is different from the constituent material of the substrate such as a screw hole for fixing the substrate. The structure in which the material is used may not be provided. If a screw hole for fixing the board is provided, when the board is fixed by screwing, the constituent material of the screw is affected by electromagnetic noise from the outside, and other signal wiring is also adversely affected such as electromagnetic interference. May cause inconvenience. In addition, a structure using a synthetic resin or a dielectric material having a dielectric constant different from that of the insulating layer included in the substrate, or a structure using a synthetic resin or a metal material having an electric conductivity different from that of the conductor layer included in the substrate is used. , If these structures are provided in a blank area close to multiple signal lines, these structures may be affected by electromagnetic noise from the outside, or these structures may affect multiple signal lines by electromagnetic noise. As a result, there is a possibility that an inconvenience that adversely affects electromagnetic interference may occur. On the other hand, in the blank area such as the space area 30AK0SP, which is close to the wiring pattern forming the signal wiring, a structure using a material different from the constituent material of the substrate is not provided, which causes these disadvantages. This can be prevented or suppressed.

In the section 30AK0SC shown in FIG. 18, one of the wiring patterns 30AK10D to 30AK13D forming a plurality of signal wirings for transmitting a data signal has a shape different from a linear shape and a substantially linear shape such as a meandering shape. Is formed so as to include a portion of the signal wiring having a shape different from the shape parallel and substantially parallel to the other signal wiring. On the other hand, at least the pattern 30AK10D and the pattern 30AK11D are formed in the section 30AK0SC so as not to include a meandering shape but to have a linear shape or a substantially linear shape such that the signal wirings thereof are parallel or substantially parallel to each other. .. Therefore, the patterns 30AK10D and 30AK11D are patterns in which the signal wiring connects the section 30AK0SC in the shortest or substantially the shortest. On the other hand, the patterns 30AK12D and 30AK13D are patterns in which the signal wiring connects the section 30AK0SC at a longer distance than the patterns 30AK10D and 30AK11D.

In the section 30AK0SC, in a portion where the signal wiring formed by the pattern 30AK13D has a shape different from a linear shape such as a meandering shape and a substantially linear shape, the signal wiring formed by the other patterns 30AK10D to 30AK12D has a linear shape or It is formed to have a substantially linear shape. As described above, in a portion where the signal wiring formed by one wiring pattern among the wiring patterns forming the plurality of signal wirings has a shape different from the linear shape such as the meandering shape and the substantially linear shape, The signal wiring formed by the wiring pattern may be formed in a linear shape or a substantially linear shape. In a portion where the signal wiring configured by one wiring pattern has a shape different from the linear shape such as the meandering shape and the substantially linear shape, the signal wiring configured by the other wiring pattern has the linear shape or the substantially linear shape. It may be formed so as not to overlap with the portion. The wiring pattern is formed so that the portions that are different from the linear shape such as the meandering shape and the substantially linear shape do not overlap with each other for a plurality of signal wirings, and the increase in the area of the board on which the wiring pattern is arranged is suppressed. As a result, the size of the substrate can be reduced.

FIG. 24 shows another example of formation of a wiring pattern in which portions where a plurality of signal wirings have a meandering shape do not overlap. Also in the region 30AK20R shown in FIG. 24, in a portion where the signal wiring formed by one wiring pattern among the wiring patterns forming the plurality of signal wirings has a meandering shape, signals formed by other wiring patterns The wiring is formed to have a linear shape or a substantially linear shape. Then, when the first meandering portion, which is the portion in which the first signal wiring formed by the pattern of the first wiring has the meandering shape, ends, the second wiring formed by the pattern of the second wiring different from the pattern of the first wiring A wiring pattern forming a plurality of signal wirings is formed so that the second meandering portion, which is a portion in which the signal wirings have a meandering shape, is started. In the first meandering portion, the wiring patterns including the patterns of the second wirings forming the second signal wirings as the wirings of the signal wirings other than the first signal wirings are the signal wirings formed by the respective patterns. Need only be formed to have a parallel or substantially parallel shape. In the second meandering portion, the wiring patterns including the first wiring pattern forming the first signal wiring as the wiring patterns forming the signal wiring other than the second signal wiring are signal wirings formed by the respective patterns. Need only be formed to have a parallel or substantially parallel shape. Since the second meandering portion is started after the first meandering portion ends, the first meandering portion is arranged so as not to overlap with the second meandering portion. Thereby, even when a portion having a shape different from a linear shape such as a meandering shape and a substantially linear shape is provided for a large number of signal wirings, an increase in the substrate area on which the wiring pattern is arranged is suppressed as much as possible The size of the substrate can be reduced.

The wiring pattern in which the portions of the plurality of signal wirings having the meandering shape do not overlap each other is formed such that the signal wirings have the same or substantially the same wiring length. In the first signal wiring formed by the pattern of the first wiring among the wiring patterns forming the plurality of signal wirings, the second signal wiring formed by the pattern of the second wiring has a linear shape or a substantially linear shape. A first meandering portion having a meandering shape corresponding to the second straight portion is included. In the second signal wiring formed by the pattern of the second wiring among the wiring patterns forming the plurality of signal wirings, the first signal wiring formed by the pattern of the first wiring has a linear shape or a substantially linear shape. A second meandering portion having a meandering shape corresponding to the first straight portion is included. By including the first meandering portion and the second meandering portion in this way, an increase in the area of the substrate on which the wiring pattern is arranged is suppressed, and the size of the substrate can be reduced.

Alternatively, the first meandering portion in which the first signal wiring formed by the pattern of the first wiring has a meandering shape is different from the second meandering portion in which the second signal wiring formed by the pattern of the second wiring has a meandering shape. The signal wiring may meander in the direction. By meandering the signal wiring in this manner, an increase in the area of the substrate on which the wiring pattern is arranged is suppressed, and the size of the substrate can be reduced.

Alternatively, the wiring pattern in which the plurality of signal wirings have a serpentine shape may include a first wiring pattern in which the wiring width of the signal wiring is narrow and a second wiring pattern in which the wiring width of the signal wiring is wide. By forming the wiring pattern in this way, a signal wiring having appropriate transmission line characteristics is configured according to, for example, the types of signals transmitted by the plurality of signal wirings, and the signal wirings are transmitted by the plurality of signal wirings. It is possible to improve the reliability of the signal that is generated.

Alternatively, some or all of the plurality of signal wirings have different shapes from the linear shape and the substantially linear shape, such as a meandering shape, and are parallel or substantially parallel to each other. You may provide the parallel meander part in which a pattern is formed. By providing the parallel meandering portion, it is possible to suppress an increase in the area of the substrate on which the wiring pattern is arranged and to reduce the size of the substrate.

Alternatively, one or all of the signal wirings are connected to one signal wiring and another signal wiring at a non-linear portion having a shape different from the linear shape and the substantially linear shape, such as a meandering shape. A wiring pattern may be formed so that the electrical component connected to the wiring is mounted. By mounting the electric components in this way, it is possible to suppress an increase in the wiring pattern, the area of the substrate on which the electric components are arranged, and to reduce the size of the substrate.

Alternatively, when some or all of the plurality of signal wirings include a non-linear portion having a shape different from the linear shape and the substantially linear shape, for example, a meandering shape, a shape different from the non-linear portion A wiring pattern may be formed so that each signal wiring is connected to an electric component at the portion. By connecting to the electric component in this way, an increase in the area of the wiring pattern and the area of the substrate on which the electric component is arranged can be suppressed, and the size of the substrate can be reduced.

A wiring pattern formed so that at least one of the plurality of signal wirings has a shape different from the linear shape and the substantially linear shape, or at least one signal wiring is parallel and substantially parallel to other signal wirings. The wiring pattern formed to have a shape different from the shape is formed such that the signal wires have the same or substantially the same wiring length. Regarding the first signal wiring formed by the pattern of the first wiring among the wiring patterns forming the plurality of signal wirings, the second signal wiring formed by the pattern of the second wiring has a linear shape and a substantially linear shape. A linear shape or a substantially linear shape may be provided corresponding to a portion having a different shape, or corresponding to a portion having a shape different from the shape in which the second signal wiring is parallel and substantially parallel to the first signal wiring. A test point is provided on a portion where the second signal wiring has a shape different from the linear shape and the substantially linear shape, or a portion where the second signal wiring has a shape different from the shape parallel and substantially parallel to the first signal wiring. You may provide the specific conductor part used as this. The test point may be a specific conductor portion configured so that a probe for inspecting an electrical connection state by signal wiring or an electric component can be brought into contact therewith. By providing the test points in this manner, it is possible to appropriately arrange the wiring patterns and various structures, and to suppress the increase in the substrate area and to reduce the size of the substrate.

Alternatively, the specific conductor portion such as the test point may be formed using a metal material such as solder or copper foil, and may have a shape larger than the wiring width of the signal wiring. By thus forming the test points and the like, it is possible to appropriately arrange the wiring patterns and various structures, thereby suppressing an increase in the substrate area and reducing the size of the substrate. it can.

Alternatively, the specific conductor portion such as the test point is a conductor layer different from the layer in which the plurality of signal wirings and the test point are provided among the plurality of layers included in the multilayer wiring board, due to the through hole provided in the multilayer wiring board. , May be electrically connected. By thus forming the test points and the like, it is possible to appropriately arrange the wiring patterns and various structures, thereby suppressing an increase in the substrate area and reducing the size of the substrate. it can.

For example, a wiring pattern in which at least one signal wiring of the plurality of signal wirings is formed in a shape different from the linear shape and the substantially linear shape on one substrate surface such as the front surface side substrate surface, or at least one signal wiring The wiring pattern formed such that the wiring has a shape different from the shape parallel and substantially parallel to the other signal wirings is formed such that the signal lengths of the signal wirings are the same or substantially the same. Regarding the first signal wiring formed by the pattern of the first wiring among the wiring patterns forming the plurality of signal wirings, the second signal wiring formed by the pattern of the second wiring has a linear shape and a substantially linear shape. A linear shape or a substantially linear shape may be provided corresponding to a portion having a different shape, or corresponding to a portion having a shape different from the shape in which the second signal wiring is parallel and substantially parallel to the first signal wiring. Then, the specific conductor portion serving as the test point may be provided on the other substrate surface different from the one substrate surface on which the wiring pattern is formed, such as the substrate surface on the back surface side. By providing the test points in this manner, it is possible to appropriately arrange the wiring patterns and various structures, and to suppress the increase in the substrate area and to reduce the size of the substrate.

(Explanation about deformation and application)
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-mentioned embodiment, and it is possible to solve at least one problem in the related art, and the part described in the above-mentioned embodiment It may be provided with the structure of. For example, any one of the features shown in the above-described embodiments may be provided as long as it has at least one feature that enables an appropriate substrate configuration.

In the above-described embodiment, at least one signal wiring of the plurality of signal wirings that electrically connects the plurality of electric components has a shape different from the linear shape and the substantially linear shape, and is parallel to the other signal wirings. As a shape different from the substantially parallel shape, it has been described as including a portion having a meandering shape, a meander shape, a zigzag shape, and a folded shape. On the other hand, a shape different from a straight line shape or a substantially straight line shape, or a shape different from a shape parallel or substantially parallel to other signal wiring is different from a meandering shape such as a curved shape or a spiral shape, and the wiring length of the signal wiring is different. Any shape that can be extended or adjusted can be used. By including at least one signal wiring of the plurality of signal wirings electrically connecting the plurality of electric components, the portion having a shape capable of extending the wiring length, It suffices that the wiring lengths are the same or substantially the same, and the delay time difference between signals transmitted through a plurality of signal wirings can be prevented or suppressed.

The plurality of electrical components electrically connected by the plurality of signal wirings are not limited to the RAM 102 and the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11, and may be any electrical component provided in a gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1. .. For example, as a plurality of electric parts, the production control CPU 120 and the RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 are electrically connected by a plurality of signal wirings, and at least one of the plurality of signal wirings has a linear shape and The wiring pattern may be formed so as to have a shape different from the substantially linear shape and different from the shapes parallel and substantially parallel to the other signal wirings. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 is an electrical component configured to be able to execute a predetermined process regarding the effect control in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the RAM 122 can store information related to the execution of the process by the effect control CPU 120. It is an electrical component configured in. Alternatively, instead of the RAM 102 in the above-mentioned embodiment, an electric component such as a ROM 101 capable of storing information regarding execution of processing by the CPU 103 may be used. Alternatively, it may be an electric component such as a graphics processor included in the display control unit 123 instead of the effect control CPU 120, which is capable of executing a process related to an effect different from that of the effect control CPU 120. Furthermore, instead of the RAM 122, an electric component such as a ROM 121 capable of storing information regarding execution of processing by the effect control CPU 120 may be used. Further, instead of the RAM 122, an electric data component such as an image data memory capable of storing information regarding execution of processing by the effect control CPU 120 or the graphics processor of the display control unit 123 may be used.

The effect control board 12 may be configured as a multilayer wiring board, like the main board 11 in the above-described embodiment. The plurality of signal wirings in the above-described embodiment are electrically connected to a plurality of processing devices such as a production control CPU 120 mounted on the production control board 12 and a graphics processor included in the display control unit 123. The wiring pattern may be formed. Alternatively, the plurality of signal wirings have a wiring pattern formed so that a plurality of electric components such as a graphics processor included in the display control unit 123 and an input/output port for a video signal are electrically connected. May be A wiring pattern is formed so that an arbitrary electric circuit different from the plural electric parts, such as a filter circuit or a buffer circuit, is interposed in the plural signal wires to which the plural electric parts are connected. It may be one. In the plurality of signal wirings, for example, digital video signals indicating respective levels (RGB values) of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) display colors in the image display device 5 are transmitted by a parallel signal method. May be done. Alternatively, in a plurality of signal wirings, signals relating to game control and effect control may be transmitted by a parallel signal system such as an LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signal) system. In these parallel signal systems, synchronized signal transmission may be required in a plurality of signal wirings. Therefore, as in the above-described embodiment, by forming a wiring pattern so that a portion having a meandering shape or the like is provided, the wiring length of each signal wiring included in a plurality of signal wirings is the same or substantially the same. As a result, the delay time difference between signals transmitted through a plurality of signal lines can be reduced.

The signals are not limited to signals transmitted by the parallel signal system, and for example, video signals supplied to the image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, game effect lamps 9, effect motors 60, and effect LEDs 61 for effects. When the control signal supplied to the electric component is transmitted by the serial signal method, the signal wiring for transmitting the clock signal and the signal wiring for transmitting the data signal are the plurality of wirings in the above embodiment. It may be included in the signal wiring. Further, when the video signal and the control signal are transmitted by the serial signal method, the signal wiring for transmitting the signal by the differential signal transmission method may be included in the plurality of signal wirings in the above-described embodiments.

For example, a signal wiring having a distance between connection terminals of a plurality of electric components longer than other signal wirings, such as a signal wiring formed by the wiring pattern 30AK10D, has a shape different from the linear shape and the substantially linear shape. The wiring pattern may be formed so as to include a portion having a shape different from the shape parallel and substantially parallel to the other signal wiring. Even for a signal wiring in which the distance between the connection terminals of the plurality of electric components is shorter than that of the other signal wiring, the wiring length may be longer than the other signal wiring depending on the design of the wiring pattern on the substrate. In such a case, the selection of the signal wiring that includes a portion having a meandering shape or the like of the plurality of signal wirings and the signal wiring that does not include such a portion depends on the design of the wiring pattern on the substrate. It may be arbitrarily changed depending on the situation.

The receptacle KRE1 is not limited to being surface-mounted on the board of the effect control board 12, but may be surface-mounted on any board such as the board of the main board 11. The various power supply voltages are not limited to those supplied to the production control board 12, and may be supplied to any control board such as the main board 11 or the payout control board. Various electric circuits and electric parts are not limited to those arranged on the production control board 12, and may be arranged on any control board such as the main board 11 or the payout control board.

The present invention can be applied not only to the pachinko gaming machine 1 but also to a slot machine or the like. The slot machine is, for example, an arbitrary gaming machine that performs a predetermined game such as a variable display of symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information, and can give a predetermined game value based on the game result, and more specifically, The game can be started by setting a predetermined bet number (the number of medals or the number of credits) for one game, and a variable display device that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified by each ( One game is ended by displaying and displaying the display results of a plurality of reels, etc., and a prize is awarded according to the display result (for example, cherry prize, watermelon prize, bell prize, replay prize, BB prize, RB prize, etc.). Is a gaming machine that is capable of generating. In such a slot machine, hardware resources including a game control microcomputer for performing game control and software for performing a predetermined process cooperate with each other, so that the pachinko game shown in the above-described embodiment is executed. It may be configured to include all or some of the features of the machine 1.

In addition, the device configuration and various operations of the gaming machine can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, and encloses the game medium to score points based on the occurrence of a prize. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives The slot machine is not limited to one in which the bet amount is set by using medals and credits as a gaming value, and only a slot machine in which a bet number is set by using a gaming ball as a gaming value or only credits as a gaming value. It may be a fully creditable slot machine in which the bet amount is set by using.

(Explanation regarding problem solving means and effects)
As described above, in the gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present application, in the wiring connection device such as the receptacle KRE1, the terminals TA01 serving as the pair of ground terminals are sandwiched between the terminals TA02 serving as the signal terminals. , TA03 are surface-mounted on the board of the effect control board 12, an appropriate board configuration is possible.

The terminals TA01 and TA03 are bonded to the dummy pads DP1 and DP2, and the tip end portions of the terminals TA01 to TA03 are covered with the cover member 802 of the substrate case 800, so that an appropriate substrate configuration is possible.

The receptacle KRE1 is provided with fixing metal fittings SS01 and SS02 joined to the dummy pads DP3 and DP4 on the side surface PL2, so that an appropriate substrate configuration can be achieved.

The gap between the inner peripheral wall surface 836b and the receptacle KRE1 in the opening region 836a is formed such that the opening width W2 on the side closer to the component housing portion 802a is wider than the opening width W1 on the side far from the component housing portion 802a, so that an appropriate substrate configuration can be realized. Become.

The terminals TA01 to TA03 of the receptacle KRE1 have an exposed portion that is not covered by the cover member 802 of the substrate case 800 and an exposed portion that is covered by the cover member 802 of the substrate case 800 and is not exposed in the opening region 836a. By doing so, an appropriate substrate configuration becomes possible.

The mounting position where the terminals TA01 to TA03 of the receptacle KRE1 are surface-mounted is covered by the opening peripheral portion 840, and the opening peripheral portion 840 and the board surface of the effect control board 12 form a space SP1 close to the mounting position. Appropriate substrate configurations are possible.

Alternatively, the effect control board 12 outputs the power supply voltage VSL2 of 34V DC as it is as the power supply voltage VSL, and the driver board 19 inputs the voltage to the filter circuit 511 to stabilize the voltage, thereby enabling an appropriate board configuration. ..

Since there is no filter circuit in the power supply line LSL that supplies the power supply voltage VSL of DC 34V, an appropriate substrate configuration can be achieved.

In the receptacle KRE2, the number of terminals TA15 to TA24, TA27, TA28 connected to any of the filter circuits 131a to 131c is larger than the number of terminals TA13, TA14 not connected to the filter circuit, which is suitable. Substrate configuration is possible.

The terminals TA15 to TA24, TA27, and TA28 connected to any of the filter circuits 131a to 131c can supply a plurality of types of power supply voltages, and the production control board 12 has only one type of terminals TA13 and TA14 that are not connected to the filter circuit. Since the power supply voltage can be supplied and the terminals TA13 and TA14 are arranged outside the terminals TA15 to TA24 and the like, an appropriate substrate configuration can be achieved.

The terminals TA13 to TA24, TA27, TA28, which are power supply voltage terminals, are arranged between the terminals TA11, TA12, which are ground terminals, and the terminals TA29, TA30, which are ground terminals, so that an appropriate substrate configuration can be achieved. become.

In the receptacle KRE2, the terminals TA13 and TA14 included in the second power supply voltage terminal and the terminals TA15 to TA24 included in the first power supply voltage terminal are the terminals TA11 and TA12 included in the first ground terminal, and the second ground terminal. The terminals TA27 and TA28 included in the first power supply voltage terminal, the terminals TA25 and TA26 included in the second ground terminal, and the terminal TA29 included in the third ground terminal. , TA30, an appropriate substrate configuration is possible.

Alternatively, in the effect control board 12, after dividing one power supply voltage VDD2 into a power supply voltage VDL for driving a specific electric component and a power supply voltage VDS for supplying to the amplification circuit 521, the filter circuit 131a is connected. By supplying the stabilized power supply voltage VDS to the amplifier circuit 521, an appropriate substrate configuration becomes possible.

By setting the wiring length LL2 from the filter circuit 131a to the amplifier circuit 521 to be shorter than the wiring length LL1 from when the power supply voltage VDL is branched at the branch point DB1 to when the power supply voltage VDL is input to the filter circuit 131a, an appropriate substrate configuration can be obtained. It will be possible.

Alternatively, in the noise prevention circuits 135a and 135b, by using a resistor which is a circuit element different from that of the noise prevention circuit 135c, an appropriate substrate configuration can be realized.

The noise prevention circuits 135a and 135b are provided in correspondence with the power supply voltage for driving a specific electric component such as a motor or an LED, and the noise prevention circuit 135c has a power supply voltage for driving a specific electric circuit such as a CPU or a ROM. By being provided correspondingly, an appropriate substrate configuration becomes possible.

Alternatively, in the step-down converter circuit 132, the power supply voltage VDD3 stabilized by the filter circuit 131c is input to output a power supply voltage of DC 1.05V and a power supply voltage of DC 3.3V, and the regulator circuit 133 supplies DC By inputting the power supply voltage of 3.3V and outputting the power supply voltage of DC 1.5V, an appropriate substrate configuration can be realized.

The power supply voltage VDC that is the same as or substantially the same as the voltage supplied to the step-down converter circuit 132 is supplied to the power supply monitoring circuit 140, so that an appropriate substrate configuration can be achieved.

The power supply voltage of 1.05 V DC output from the step-down converter circuit 132 is supplied to a specific microprocessor such as a graphics processor of the display control unit 123, so that an appropriate board configuration can be achieved.

The DC 3.3V power supply voltage output from the step-down converter circuit 132 is supplied to, for example, the ROM 121, and is activated before an electric component such as the RAM 122 driven by the DC 1.5V power supply voltage output from the regulator circuit 133. By being possible, an appropriate substrate configuration is possible.

The power supply voltage of 1.5 V DC output from the regulator circuit 133 is supplied to a component different from the effect control substrate 12, such as the RAM 122, so that an appropriate substrate configuration becomes possible.

(Explanation on Problem Solving Means and Effects of Characteristic Section 30AK)
For example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like, which is a gaming machine that can be played. For example, as shown in FIG. 17, a pattern forming a plurality of signal wirings is formed, and a plurality of electrical wirings such as a RAM 102 and a CPU 103 are formed by the plurality of signal wirings. A pattern is provided with a substrate such as a main substrate 11 to which components are connected, and the pattern has a plurality of signal wirings such as a region 30AK10R and a parallel wiring portion having a first shape in which a plurality of signal wirings are parallel or substantially parallel. At least one signal wiring of the wirings includes a specific wiring portion having a second shape that is not parallel to other signal wirings, and the signal wirings included in the plurality of signal wirings have the same or substantially the same wiring length. Become. As a result, an appropriate board configuration that reduces the delay time difference between the signals transmitted through the plurality of signal wirings becomes possible.

For example, the signal wiring that does not include the second shape, such as the signal wiring that is formed by the wiring pattern 30AK10D, has a distance between the connection terminals of the plurality of electric components that is, for example, the signal wiring that is formed by the wiring patterns 30AK11D to 30AK13D. It may be longer than the signal wiring including the shape. As a result, an increase in the area of the board on which the wiring pattern is arranged is suppressed, and an appropriate board configuration for downsizing the board is possible.

For example, the conductor may not be provided in a predetermined region such as the space region 30AK0SP, which is close to the signal wiring having the second shape. As a result, it is possible to realize an appropriate substrate configuration in which electromagnetic interference due to electromagnetic noise in the plurality of signal wirings is prevented or suppressed.

The substrate is provided with through holes, such as through holes 30AK1H and 30AK2H, which can electrically connect signal wiring provided on one surface of the substrate and signal wiring provided on the other surface of the substrate. The wiring lengths of the signal wirings included in may be the same or substantially the same for the signal wirings connected by the through holes, including the lengths of the through holes. As a result, an appropriate substrate configuration that reduces the delay time difference between the signals transmitted by the plurality of signal wirings becomes possible.

The substrate includes a plurality of layers such as a surface layer 30AK1S, a ground layer 30AK1L, a power supply layer 30AK2L, a wiring layer 30AK3L, a power supply layer 30AK4L, and a back surface layer 30AK2S, and a signal wiring having a second shape among the plurality of layers is provided. Signal transmission may not be performed in a conductor layer such as the ground layer 30AK1L adjacent to the layer. As a result, it is possible to realize an appropriate substrate configuration in which electromagnetic interference due to electromagnetic noise in the plurality of signal wirings is prevented or suppressed.

As the plurality of electric components, a processing unit capable of executing a predetermined process, such as the CPU 103, and a storage unit capable of storing information regarding the execution of the process, such as the RAM 102, may be connected. As a result, it is possible to realize an appropriate board configuration that reduces the difference in delay time of signals transmitted by a plurality of signal wirings connected to the processing means and the storage means as a plurality of electric components.

Alternatively, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like, which is a gaming machine that can be played, for example, as shown in FIG. 17, a pattern forming a plurality of signal wirings is formed, and a plurality of signal wirings such as a RAM 102 and a CPU 103 are formed. Of the main board 11 to which the electric components of FIG. The signal wiring may include a specific wiring portion having a second shape different from the first shape, and the wiring lengths of the signal wirings included in the plurality of signal wirings may be the same or substantially the same. As a result, an appropriate substrate configuration that reduces the delay time difference between the signals transmitted by the plurality of signal wirings becomes possible.

Alternatively, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like, which is a gaming machine that can be played, for example, as shown in FIG. 17, a pattern forming a plurality of signal wirings is formed, and a plurality of signal wirings such as a RAM 102 and a CPU 103 are formed. The main shape of the main board 11 to which the electric components are connected, and the pattern has a first shape in which at least one signal wiring of a plurality of signal wirings includes a linear shape or a substantially linear shape, for example, a wiring pattern 30AK10D. And a second pattern in which other signal wirings not included in the first pattern among the plurality of signal wirings, such as wiring patterns 30AK11D to 30AK13D, have a second shape different from the first shape. In the first pattern and the second pattern, the wiring lengths of the signal wirings included in the plurality of signal wirings may be the same or substantially the same. As a result, an appropriate substrate configuration that reduces the delay time difference between the signals transmitted by the plurality of signal wirings becomes possible.

Alternatively, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like, which is a gaming machine that can be played, for example, as shown in FIG. 17, a pattern forming a plurality of signal wirings is formed, and a plurality of signal wirings such as a RAM 102 and a CPU 103 are formed. The main board 11 or the like to which the electric components of FIG. 1 are connected, and the pattern is a wiring of at least one of the plurality of signal wirings that connects a predetermined section such as the section 30AK0SC at the shortest or substantially the shortest distance. Wiring patterns 30AK12D, 30AK13D, etc. in which the first patterns such as the patterns 30AK10D, 30AK11D and other signal wirings not included in the first pattern among the plurality of signal wirings connect a predetermined section at a distance longer than the first pattern In the first pattern and the second pattern, the wiring length of each signal wiring included in the plurality of signal wirings may be the same or substantially the same. As a result, an appropriate substrate configuration that reduces the delay time difference between the signals transmitted by the plurality of signal wirings becomes possible.

The first pattern may have a longer distance between the connection terminals in the plurality of electric components than the second pattern. As a result, an increase in the area of the board on which the wiring pattern is arranged is suppressed, and an appropriate board configuration for downsizing the board is possible.

For example, the conductor may not be provided in a predetermined region close to the second pattern, such as the space region 30AK0SP. As a result, it is possible to realize an appropriate substrate configuration in which electromagnetic interference due to electromagnetic noise in the plurality of signal wirings is prevented or suppressed.

The substrate includes a plurality of layers such as a surface layer 30AK1S, a ground layer 30AK1L, a power supply layer 30AK2L, a wiring layer 30AK3L, a power supply layer 30AK4L, and a back surface layer 30AK2S. Signal transmission may not be performed in a conductor layer such as the ground layer 30AK1L that is adjacent to the layer provided. As a result, it is possible to realize an appropriate substrate configuration in which electromagnetic interference due to electromagnetic noise in the plurality of signal wirings is prevented or suppressed.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples of the embodiments described later.

In addition, all or part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example and the configurations shown in the below-described exemplary embodiment and each modified example may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be understood that the above-described embodiment and the below-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplifications in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description, but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

The gaming machine of the present invention is, in addition, a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like), in which a pattern forming a plurality of signal wirings is formed (for example, see FIG. 17), A board (for example, a main board 11 or the like) to which a plurality of electric components (for example, the RAM 102 and the CPU 103) are connected by a plurality of signal wirings is provided, and the pattern has a first shape in which the plurality of signal wirings are parallel or substantially parallel. Parallel wiring portion (for example, the area 30AK10R) and a specific wiring portion (for example, the area 30AK11R) in which at least one of the plurality of signal wirings has a second shape that is not parallel to other signal wirings. Including, the wiring lengths of the signal wirings included in the plurality of signal wirings are the same or substantially the same, and further, specific production means capable of executing the specific production that maintains the aspect of the production (for example, in the sub-image display device 9051). The effect control CPU 90120 and the like capable of executing a specific effect for maintaining the orientation) is provided, and as the specific effect, a period for maintaining the first mode (a period for maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 in the vertical direction) and a second mode. Can be performed in a period different from the period in which the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the horizontal direction, and the degree of expectation that the advantageous state is controlled according to the length of the period in which the second mode is maintained. Different (for example, when the specific effect is executed, the longer the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the sideways direction, the higher the jackpot expectation, etc.) can be mentioned.

With such a configuration, an appropriate substrate configuration can be achieved. Further, it is possible to pay attention to the period in which the mode of production is maintained.

It should be noted that a pattern forming the plurality of signal wirings has a parallel wiring portion having a first shape in which the plurality of signal wirings are parallel or substantially parallel, and at least one signal wiring of the plurality of signal wirings is different from other signal wirings. A board including a specific wiring portion having a second shape that is not parallel and configured such that the wiring lengths of the signal wirings included in the plurality of signal wirings are the same or substantially the same is mounted on the gaming machine. Some of the plurality of boards (for example, main boards 11 and 9011, effect control boards 12 and 9012, sound control boards 13 and 9013, and lamp control boards 14 and 9014) (for example, only main boards 11 and 9011) Alternatively, all of the plurality of boards mounted on the game machine may be used.

Further, as an example of the form of the gaming machine, which enables an appropriate board configuration and allows the user to pay attention to the period during which the mode of performance is maintained, the gaming machine can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player. (For example, a pachinko gaming machine 901 or the like) for specific effect means capable of executing a specific effect that maintains the aspect of the effect (for example, for effect control capable of executing a specific effect that maintains the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051) The CPU 90120 and the like) are provided, and as the specific effect, a period in which the first aspect is maintained (a period in which the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained vertically) and a period in which the second aspect is maintained (the sub-image display device 9051 is horizontally oriented It is possible to execute an effect different from the period of maintaining), and the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state is different according to the length of the period of maintaining the second aspect (for example, when the specific effect is executed). , The larger the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained horizontally, the higher the expectation for a big hit, etc.). Hereinafter, an example of a form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Other form examples)
Hereinafter, another embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 25 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment, showing the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is roughly divided into a gaming board 902 that constitutes a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame 903 that supports and fixes the gaming board 902. On the game board 902, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven into it.

At a predetermined position on the game board 902, a first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided. Each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot-matrix LEDs, and the like, as a special figure game as an example of a variable display game, a plurality of types that can identify each The special symbol, which is the special identification information, is variably displayed. For example, each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". To do. Then, at the end of the variable display, the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result, and the variable display result is derived and displayed.

In addition, the variable display results and the special symbols that are variably displayed and displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B show numbers indicating "0" to "9" and "-". The present invention is not limited to those composed of symbols and the like. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns with different combinations of what is turned on and what is turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols. The variable display lighting pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are appropriately turned off.

In the following, the special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A are also referred to as “first special symbols”, and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B are “second special symbols”. Also called. The special figure game of the first special figure is also referred to as a “first special figure game”, and the special figure game of the second special figure is also referred to as a “second special figure game”.

An image display device 905 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 902. The image display device 905 is composed of, for example, an LCD or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the image display device 905, identification information different from the special symbol is displayed in the decorative symbol display area, which is a plurality of variable display parts such as three, corresponding to the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. The decorative pattern which is is variably displayed.

As an example, on the screen of the image display device 905, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are arranged. Then, corresponding to the start of one of the first special figure game and the second special figure game, each of the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C of "left", "middle", and "right", At 905R, the variation of the decorative pattern is started. After that, when the variable display result in the special drawing game is derived and displayed, in the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 905, the decorative pattern is displayed. The fixed decorative design that is the variable display result is stopped and displayed.

In this way, on the screen of the image display device 905, each can be identified in synchronization with the first special symbol game on the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol game on the second special symbol display device 904B. A plurality of types of decorative patterns are variably displayed, and at the end of the variably display, the variable display result is derived and displayed.

Note that, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means that the identification information such as the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and the variable display is ended. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of variable display of the decorative pattern to the derivation display of the fixed decorative pattern which is the variable display result, the variable speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The pattern may be displayed in a stopped state, and may be in a display state in which, for example, a slight shake or expansion/contraction occurs. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not definitely displayed, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. Becomes It should be noted that the temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative pattern in a complete stop display for a time shorter than a predetermined time without causing a slight shake or expansion/contraction.

A display area 905H is arranged on the screen of the image display device 905. In the display area 905H, a display that allows the number of special figure games whose execution is suspended to be specified can be specified. The special figure game whose execution is suspended is a special figure game which has not been started yet, and is stored as a suspended memory. In this embodiment, the information for executing the special figure game is stored, so that the special figure game corresponding to the information is stored as the pending storage. Therefore, the number of reserved special game is also referred to as the number of reserved special memory. Further, the display capable of specifying the number of pending special game games displayed in the display area 905H is also referred to as a pending storage display.

The special figure game is suspended, for example, when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A or the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 906B. It occurs based on. That is, the starting condition for executing the special drawing game is satisfied, but the special drawing game based on the previously satisfied starting condition is being executed, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, etc. Thus, when the start condition that allows the start of the special figure game is not satisfied, the special figure game corresponding to the satisfied start condition is held.

For example, when the start condition of the first special figure game is satisfied due to the occurrence of the first start prize, the first start condition for starting the first special figure game based on the satisfaction of the first start condition is satisfied. If not, 1 is added to the first special figure reservation storage number, and execution of the first special figure game is suspended. Further, when the start condition of the second special figure game is satisfied due to the occurrence of the second start winning, the second start condition for starting the second special figure game based on the establishment of the second start condition is satisfied. If not, the second special figure reservation storage number is incremented by 1, and execution of the second special figure game is suspended. When the execution of the first special figure game is started, the first special figure reservation storage number is decremented by 1, and when the execution of the second special figure game is started, the second special figure reservation storage number is decremented by 1. To be done.

The variable display special figure pending storage number obtained by adding the first special figure pending storage number and the second special figure pending storage number is also referred to as a total pending storage number in particular. When simply saying "the number of special figure reservation storages", it usually refers to a concept including all of the number of first special figure reservation storages, the number of second special figure reservation storages, and the total number of reservation storages, but particularly refers to a part of these. There is also a case.

In this embodiment, the hold storage display is performed by displaying the same number of symbol images as those of the special figure game that is held. One pending display image corresponds to one pending special figure game, and indicates the pending special figure game. The hold display image corresponding to the first special figure game is displayed in the area 905HA on the left side of the display area 905H. In the area 905HA, a plurality of display positions of the first reserved display image are set, and the first reserved display image is displayed left-justified in order from the leftmost display position. The hold display image corresponding to the second special figure game is displayed in the area 905HB on the right side of the display area 905H. In the area 905HB, a plurality of display positions of the second hold display image are set, and the second hold display image is displayed left-justified in order from the leftmost display position.

When the first special figure game is executed, the leftmost first hold display image is erased. At this time, when there is another first reserved display image, each of the other first reserved display images is shifted to the display position on the left side. When the second special figure game is executed, the leftmost second hold display image is erased. At this time, when there are other second hold display images, the other second hold display images are shifted to the display positions on the left side.

A display device for displaying the number of special figure reservation memories may be provided together with the display area 905H or instead of the display area 905H. In the example shown in FIG. 25, along with the display area 905H, the first special display device 9025A for displaying the special figure reservation storage number in a specifiable manner at the top of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. And a second hold indicator 9025B. The first hold indicator 9025A displays the first special figure hold storage number in a identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 9025B displays the second special figure hold storage number in a identifiable manner. Each of the first pending display 9025A and the second pending display 9025B is configured to include, for example, LEDs of the number corresponding to the upper limit value in each of the first special figure pending storage number and the second special figure pending storage number. .. Here, the first special figure reservation storage number and the second special figure reservation storage number are displayed according to the number of turned-on LEDs.

A sub-image display device 9051 is provided on the right side of the image display device 905. Like the image display device 905, the sub-image display device 9051 includes an LCD or the like and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the sub image display device 9051, an image related to the image displayed on the image display device 905 is displayed, and a rendering operation in which the display image on the image display device 905 and the display image on the sub image display device 9051 are interlocked with each other. Is done. Further, the sub-image display device 9051 is configured such that the front side of the image display device 905 can be rotated clockwise and counterclockwise by a drive motor 9052 shown in FIG. 26, for example.

On the screen of the sub image display device 9051, a small symbol display area 9051V smaller than the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R is provided. On the screen of the sub image display device 9051 shown in FIG. 25, a small symbol display area 9051V is provided in the lower part. In the small symbol display area 9051V, variable display of small symbols is performed in synchronization with variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. The effect image showing the small design is also referred to as a notification information image. Therefore, in the small symbol display area 9051V provided on the screen of the sub image display device 9051, the effect image showing the small symbol serving as the notification information image is variably displayed, and the effect image showing the confirmed small symbol serving as the display result. Is derived.

Thus, on the screen of the sub-image display device 9051, a variable display of a small symbol different from the decorative symbol is performed. In the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the derivation of the fixed decorative pattern which is the display result, the variable display of the small pattern is continuously performed in a constant display mode, and disappears from the screen or the shield. Will not be shielded by. Therefore, the small symbol display area 9051V is configured to be always visible, and the player can always visually recognize the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display area 9051V. The small symbol that is variably displayed in the small symbol display area 9051V is also called a constant small symbol or a production small symbol. In the small design display area 9051V, for example, a plurality of types of decorative designs, each of which is partially or entirely common to each of a plurality of types of decorative designs, such as a design showing a number similar to a portion showing a number in the decorative design, are identified. The effect image showing the small symbol may be variably displayed as the notification information image.

In addition, a special symbol, a decorative symbol, and a fourth symbol following the normal symbol are provided, and the variable symbol of the fourth symbol may be displayed in synchronization with the variable symbol of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. Variable display of the fourth symbol, for example, on the screen of the image display device 905, or in the fourth symbol display area provided on the screen of the sub-image display device 9051, display with a specific display color at fixed time intervals. It is realized by continuing the display control of repeating non-display. However, when compared with the display result in the variable display of the fourth symbol, the display result in the variable display of the small symbols may be displayed in a manner that the player can easily recognize.

In addition, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are provided at positions apart from the display screen of the image display device 905, for example, on the right side of the game area in the pachinko gaming machine 901 shown in FIG. Has been. Therefore, a player who is paying attention to the effect produced by the display on the image display device 905 or the sub-image display device 9051 is difficult to confirm the display state on the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B, and is special. It may be difficult to recognize whether the variable display of symbols is in progress or whether the display result is derived. On the other hand, by variably displaying the small symbols in the small symbol display area 9051V provided on the screen of the sub image display device 9051 and deriving the display result, whether or not the variable display is in progress, It is possible to display whether or not the display result is derived in a manner that the player can easily recognize.

Below the image display device 905, a normal winning ball device 906A and a normal variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The normal winning ball device 906A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area which is always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The ordinary variable winning ball device 906B includes an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable blades that are changed to a closed state in which the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric accessory is in a vertical position and an open state in which the tilted position is provided. 2 Create a starting winning hole.

Ordinary variable winning ball device 906B, for example, when the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position, so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port. Become. On the other hand, the normal variable winning ball device 906B is an opening in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole by the movable wing piece being in the tilted position when the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric accessory is on. It becomes a state. The normal variable winning ball device 906B is normally opened when the solenoid 9081 is in the off state, and when the solenoid 9081 is in the on state, the game ball is easier to enter the second starting winning opening than in the normally open state. It may be configured to be in a state. The normal variable winning a prize ball device 906B may be, for example, changeable between a first variable state and a second variable state in which a game ball is more likely to enter the second starting winning port than the first variable state.

The game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 906A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 9022A. The game ball that has entered the second starting winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball device 906B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 9022B. If a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize ball on the basis of the game ball being detected by the first starting opening switch 9022A, and the first special figure reserved memory number is less than the predetermined upper limit value, the first start The condition is met. If a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 9022B, and the number of the second special figure reserved memory is less than the predetermined upper limit value, the second start The condition is met.

A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided below the normal winning ball device 906A and the normal variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning prize ball device 907 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 9082 for a special winning opening door, and the special winning as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Forming a mouth.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door is in the off state, the special winning opening door closes the special winning opening to prevent the game ball from entering the special winning opening. .. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door is in the on state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. To do. In this way, the special winning opening as the specific area changes into an open state in which the game ball is easy to enter and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter and is disadvantageous to the player. Instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the special winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily enter the special winning opening may be provided.

The game ball that has entered the special winning opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 9023. Based on the detection of the game ball by the count switch 9023, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball enters the special winning opening which has been opened in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the game ball enters another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls will be paid out. Therefore, when the special winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 907, the game ball can enter the special winning opening, which is the first state advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 907, it becomes impossible or difficult to get the game ball into the special winning opening, and it is more difficult than in the first state. The second state is disadvantageous for the person.

At a predetermined position of the game board 902, a normal symbol display device 9020 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display 9020 is composed of LEDs of a 7-segment or dot matrix similar to the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, for example, a plurality of types different from the special symbol. The normal pattern which is the identification information is variably displayed, and the display result is derived and displayed at the end of the variable display. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is referred to as a universal figure game. Above the normal symbol display 9020, a universal figure hold display 9025C is provided. The universal figure hold indicator 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure reserves as the number of effective passage balls that have passed through the passage gate 9041 formed in the game area.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 902 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game balls, and a large number of obstacle nails. Further, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the big winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. You may be asked. In this case, a predetermined number of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that the game ball that has entered one of the general winning openings has been detected by a predetermined general winning ball switch. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting a sound effect and the like are provided at upper and left positions of the gaming machine frame 903, and a game effect lamp 909 for a game effect is provided in the peripheral portion of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 909 is configured to include an LED. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 903, a hit ball operation handle operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball as a game medium toward a game area is provided. For example, the hit ball operation handle adjusts the elastic force of the game ball according to the amount of operation by the player or the like.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 903 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine are held so as to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. A plate is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 903, a lower plate is provided that holds excess balls and the like overflowing from the upper plate so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

A stick controller 9031A that can be held by a player and tilted is attached to a member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body. The stick controller 9031A includes an operation stick held by the player, and has a trigger button at a predetermined position of the operation stick. The trigger button may be configured so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operating finger while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 9031A with the operating hand. It suffices that a trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation with respect to the trigger button is built in the operation rod.

A controller sensor unit 9035A including a tilt direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate below the stick controller 9031A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit is two transmissive photosensors arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 902 on the left side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the side of the player who faces the pachinko gaming machine 901, It is configured to include four transmissive photosensors that are a combination of two transmissive photosensors that are arranged perpendicularly to the board surface of the game board 902 on the right side of the center position of the operating rod when viewed from the player's side. Just do it. The controller sensor unit 9035A outputs a signal corresponding to the operation on the stick controller 9031A to the effect control board 9012 in FIG.

A member forming the upper plate is provided with a push button 9031B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper plate body, for example. The push button 9031B may be configured to be capable of mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detecting a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation by the player. A push sensor 9035B that mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detects a player's operation performed on the push button 9031B is provided inside the main body of the upper plate or the like at the installation position of the push button 9031B. It should be. The push sensor 9035B outputs a signal corresponding to the operation on the push button 9031B to the effect control board 9012 in FIG.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, a voice control board 9013, and a lamp control board 9014 as shown in FIG. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is also equipped with a relay board 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, a touch sensor board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the game board or the like of the pachinko gaming machine 901. ..

The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The main board 9011 is mainly used for setting a random number used in a special drawing game, a function for receiving a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and a command for a sub-side control board including an effect control board 9012 and the like. It has a function of outputting a control command as an example of information as a control signal and transmitting it, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like. In addition, the main board 9011 controls the first special figure game and the second special figure game by performing lighting/extinguishing control of each LED and the like that compose the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. It also has a function of controlling variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the normal game by the normal symbol display 9020 by performing lighting/extinction/coloring control of the normal symbol display 9020. The main board 9011 also has a function of controlling the first hold indicator 9025A, the second hold indicator 9025B, the universal figure hold indicator 9025C, and the like to display various numbers of hold memories.

On the main board 9011, for example, a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110, a solenoid circuit 90111, etc. are mounted. The switch circuit 90110 takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting a game ball and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 90100. It should be noted that the various switches may be those having an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a so-called sensor. The solenoid circuit 90111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 90100 to a solenoid 9081 for a normal electric accessory or a solenoid 9082 for a special winning opening door.

The effect control board 9012 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 9011, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and displays the image display device 905 and the speakers 908L and 908R. , Various circuits for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric parts such as the game effect lamp 909 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 9012 has a function of performing a display operation in the image display device 905, a sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, and a lighting/extinguishing operation in the game effect lamp 909, that is, an electric component for effect. It has a function of controlling and executing a predetermined effect operation. The effect control board 9012 has a function of detecting an operation to the stick controller 9031A based on a signal from the controller sensor unit 9035A, and a function of detecting an operation to the push button 9031B based on a signal from the push sensor 9035B. It also has a function of causing an electric component for performance to perform a performance operation according to the detected operation.

The voice control board 9013 is a control board for voice output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and is an audio signal for outputting sound from the speakers 908L and 908R based on a signal from the effect control board 9012. A processing circuit for executing processing is mounted.

The lamp control board 9014 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and a lamp for turning on/off the game effect lamp 909 and the like based on a signal from the effect control board 9012. A driver circuit etc. are mounted.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted as an electric signal. Each effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE and the second byte indicates EXT. It may be set in advance so that the leading bit of MODE data is always "1" and the leading bit of EXT data is "0".

The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM 90101 for storing a game control program and fixed data, and a RAM 90102 for providing a game control work area. A CPU 90103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, a random number circuit 90104 that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 90103, and an I/O 90105.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes a program read from the ROM 90101 to execute processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. At this time, the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101 to read fixed data, the CPU 90103 writes variable data to the RAM 90102 to temporarily store the variable data, and the CPU 90103 stores variable data temporarily stored to the RAM 90102. Variable data read operation to read out, CPU 90103 receives an input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I/O 90105, CPU 90103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I/O 90105 And a transmission operation for outputting various signals are also performed.

It should be noted that the one-chip microcomputer serving as the game control microcomputer 90100 may have at least the RAM 90102 incorporated therein in addition to the CPU 90103, and the ROM 90101, the random number circuit 90104, the I/O 90105, etc. may be externally attached.

In the game control microcomputer 90100, for example, a random number circuit 90104 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The random number used to control the progress of the game is also called a game random number. The game random number may be updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 90104, or may be updated by software when the CPU 90103 of the game control microcomputer 90100 executes a predetermined computer program. May be. For example, a random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100 or a random counter provided in an internal register separate from the RAM 90102 stores numerical value data indicating a predetermined random number value, and the CPU 90103 The random number value may be updated by updating the stored value regularly or irregularly.

The ROM 90101 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 stores various selection data, table data, etc. used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 90101 stores data that configures a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the CPU 90103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, in the ROM 90101, table data that configures a plurality of command transmission tables used by the CPU 90103 to transmit control signals that are various control commands from the main board 9011 and a variation pattern table that stores a plurality of types of variation patterns are stored. The constituent table data and the like are stored.

A RAM 90102 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 temporarily stores rewritably various data used for controlling progress of a game in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

The I/O 90105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals are input from the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100. It

On the effect control board 9012, an effect control CPU 90120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 90121 that stores an effect control program and fixed data, a RAM 90122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 90120, and an image display device. A random number circuit for updating numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the display control unit 90123 that executes a process for determining the control content of the display operation in the sub image display device 905 and the display control unit 9051 and the effect control CPU 90120. 90124 and I/O 90125 are mounted.

As an example, in the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 90121, thereby executing the process of controlling the effect operation by the effect electric components. At this time, the effect control CPU 90120 reads out fixed data from the ROM 90121 for a fixed data read operation, the effect control CPU 90120 writes various variable data in the RAM 90122 for temporary storage, and the effect control CPU 90120 writes in the RAM 90122. A fluctuation data read operation for reading out various kinds of temporarily stored fluctuation data, a reception operation in which the effect control CPU 90120 receives an input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 9012 via the I/O 90125, and the effect control CPU 90120 performs an I/O operation. A transmission operation of outputting various signals to the outside of the production control board 9012 via O90125 is also performed.

The effect control CPU 90120, the ROM 90121, and the RAM 90122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 9012.

In the effect control board 9012, for example, by the random number circuit 90124 or the like, the numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the effect operation are updatable counted. The random number used to control such a production operation is also referred to as a production random number. The effect random number may be updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 90124, like the game random number used on the main board 9011. The effect control CPU 90120 executes a predetermined computer program. It may be updated by software.

In the ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 26, various data tables and the like used for controlling the effect operation are stored in addition to the effect control program. For example, the ROM 90121 stores a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 90120 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data configuring a determination table, pattern data configuring various effect control patterns, and the like. Remembered The effect control pattern is a collection of data for executing various effects such as variable display of decorative designs and reach effect, and for example, effect control execution data and end code associated with the effect control process timer determination value. It is composed of the included process data, is composed by combining the pattern data, and is set as a usage pattern described later. Further, the pattern data which is the effect control pattern as it is is also stored, and the pattern data may be set as the effect control pattern which is the use pattern as it is.

The RAM 90122 mounted on the effect control board 9012 stores various data used for controlling the effect operation.

The display control unit 90123 mounted on the effect control board 9012 outputs the video signal of the effect image to be displayed on the image display device 905 or the sub image display device 9051 based on the control of the effect control CPU 90120, and the image display device 905. Display the effect image on. As an example, the display control unit 90123 may be equipped with VDP, CGROM, VRAM, or the like. The VDP may be a GPU, a GCL, or a microprocessor for image processing more commonly called a DSP. The CGROM may be a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. It may be configured. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 transmits, to the display control unit 90123, a display control command that specifies an effect image to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 905 according to the display control data included in the effect control pattern. According to the display control command from the effect control CPU 90120, the display control unit 90123 outputs a video signal for displaying the effect image designated by the display control command, using the data stored in the CGROM or the like. As a result, the video signal of the effect image according to the control of the effect control CPU 90120 is output, and the effect image is displayed on the image display device 905.

The I/O 90125 mounted on the production control board 9012 is, for example, an input port for receiving the production control command transmitted from the main board 9011 or the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the production control board 9012. It is configured to include and. For example, from the output port of the I/O 90125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 905 or the sub image display device 9051, a control signal transmitted to the audio control board 9013, or a lamp control board 9014 is transmitted. A control signal to be transmitted, a control signal transmitted to the drive motor 9052, and the like are output. An operation signal corresponding to an operation on the stick controller 9031A is input to the input port of the I/O 90125 from the controller sensor unit 9035A, and an operation signal according to an operation to the push button 9031B is input from the push sensor 9035B.

The image display device 905 includes a display panel such as a liquid crystal panel and a driver circuit that drives the display panel. The video signal supplied from the display control unit 90123 to the image display device 905 via the I/O 90125 under the control of the effect control CPU 90120 is input to the driver circuit. The driver circuit drives the display panel based on the input video signal to display the image represented by the video signal on the display panel. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the image display device 905.

With the above-described configuration, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the speakers 908L and 908R via the sound control board 9013 to output sound, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 909 via the lamp control board 9014. Various effects are executed by displaying an effect image in the display area of the image display device 905 via the display control unit 90123.

The drive motor 9052 is composed of, for example, a stepping motor or the like, and is driven according to the drive signal transmitted from the effect control board 9012 to control the sub-image display device 9051 to rotate clockwise and counterclockwise.

As an example of a game using a game ball, a launching motor provided in a predetermined ball launching device based on a player's predetermined operation of a ball hitting handle installed on the lower right of the front surface of the housing of a pachinko gaming machine 901. As a result, a game ball as a game medium is launched toward the game area.

When the game ball flowing down the game area passes through the passage gate 9041 and is detected by the gate switch 9021, based on this detection, the normal figure starting condition for executing the general figure game on the normal symbol display 9020 is set. To establish. After that, based on the fact that the universal figure start condition for starting the variable display of the regular symbols is satisfied, such as the previous universal figure game ending, the regular figure game by the regular symbol display 9020 is started.

In the normal figure game, after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the fixed normal symbol which is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. At this time, if a specific ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "universal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol loss".

In response to the fact that the variable display result of the ordinary symbol is "universal symbol", the opening control is performed such that the movable wing piece of the electric tulip that constitutes the normally variable winning ball device 906B is in the tilted position, and the predetermined time is reached. When the time has passed, the closing control is performed to return to the vertical position.

Whether or not the variable display result of the normal symbol is set as "universal symbol hit" as the predetermined specific display result, such as when the regular symbol game by the ordinary symbol display device 9020 is started, the variable display result Is determined before displaying. Further, the variable display period of the normal symbol is also determined before the derivative display of the variable display result, such as when the universal figure game is started.

When the game ball flowing down the game area enters the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 906A, the first starting condition is satisfied because the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 9022A. .. Then, based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, by ending the previous special drawing game or the jackpot gaming state, the special drawing game using the first special drawing by the first special symbol display device 904A is started. To be done.

Further, when the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B, the second starting condition is satisfied because the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 9022B. After that, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, when the last special figure game or the jackpot gaming state is finished, the special figure game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B is started. To be done. However, when the normal variable winning a prize ball device 906B is in a closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second starting winning hole.

When the first special figure game is started, or when the second special figure game is started, whether or not to make the variable display result of the special symbol a "big hit" as a predetermined specific display result, It is determined before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined rate based on the determination of the variable display result.

After the special figure game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses, a fixed special symbol that is the variable display result is derived. Is displayed.

When a predetermined big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the special symbol, the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. Whether or not the big hit game state is controlled corresponds to whether or not the variable display result is "big hit", and is determined before the variable display result is derived and displayed. As a variable display result of the special symbol, when the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed and the lost symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result is “miss”.

As an example, the special symbols showing the numbers "3" and "7" are big hit symbols, and the special symbols showing the symbol "-" are lost symbols. It should be noted that each symbol such as the big hit symbol and the lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A may be a special symbol different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 904B. However, the special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol or a lost symbol.

In the big hit game state, the special winning opening is opened and the special variable winning ball device 907 is in the first state advantageous to the player. Then, during a predetermined period, or until a predetermined number of game balls enter the special winning opening and a winning ball is generated, a round game in which the special winning opening is continuously opened is executed. During periods other than the execution period of such a round game, the special winning opening is closed, and it becomes difficult or impossible to generate winning balls. When a game ball enters the special winning opening, the winning ball is detected by the count switch 9023, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize ball each time the game ball is detected. The round game in the big hit game state is repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number of times is reached.

When the variable display result of the special symbol is “big hit”, it includes a case where the big hit type is either “non-probable change” or “probable change”. For example, as a variable display result of the special symbol, when the big hit symbol indicating the number “3” is derived and displayed, the big hit type becomes “uncertain change”, and when the big hit symbol indicating the number “7” is derived and displayed, the big hit. The type is “probability change”. As a round game in the big hit game state in which the big hit type is “probable change” or “non-probable change”, the normal open round in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball device 907 is the first state advantageous for the player is a predetermined time is 15 It is executed a predetermined number of times such as a round. The jackpot game state in which the normally open round is executed is also called a normally open jackpot state. The big hit game state based on the "big hit" when the big hit type is "non-probable change" is called "non-probable change big hit game state". In addition, the big hit game state based on the "big hit" when the big hit type is "probable change" is called "probable change big hit game state". The “big hit” when the big hit type is “non-probable change” is sometimes referred to as “non-probable change big hit”, and the “big hit” when the big hit type is “probable change” is sometimes called “probable change big hit”.

After the jackpot gaming state is finished, the probability that the variable display result is "big hit" may be controlled to be a certain change state in which the probability is higher than in the normal state. The probability variation state is controlled to continue until a predetermined probability variation ending condition such as the start of the next big hit game state is satisfied. In addition, after the jackpot gaming state is finished, the average variable display time may be controlled to a time-saving state that is shorter than the normal state. The time saving state is controlled to continue until one of the time saving ending conditions is met first, among the fact that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has started. It The remaining number of executions of the special figure game until the time saving end condition is satisfied may be referred to as the remaining number of time saving. The time saving state and the probability change state are advantageous game states for the player.

In this embodiment, the gaming state after the non-probability-variable big-hit gaming state ends is a time saving state, but does not become the probable variation state. In this embodiment, the gaming state after the probability variation big hit game state ends is the time saving state and the probability variation control.

In the time saving state, the normal variable winning ball device 906B is opened and closed in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second start winning port than in the non-time saving state such as the normal state which is not in the time saving state. Change. For example, the control to make the variation time of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol game by the ordinary symbol display 9020 shorter than that in the normal state, and the probability that the variable display result of the ordinary symbol in each ordinary symbol game is “per ordinary symbol” To improve the tilt control time for performing the tilt control of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 906B based on the fact that the variable display result is “universal hit” compared to the normal state. The normal variable winning ball device 906B may be changed between the open state and the closed state in an advantageous change mode by the control of increasing the number of times and the control of increasing the number of tilts compared with the normal state. Note that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed. In this way, the control for changing the normally variable winning ball device 906B between the open state and the closed state in an advantageous change mode is called high open control. By controlling to such a time saving state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes a "big hit" is shortened, and the special game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

The normal state is a specific game state such as a big hit game state, a game state other than a game state that is advantageous to the player such as a time saving state, a probability variation state, etc., and the variable display result in the universal figure game is " The probability of being a "normal figure hit" and the probability of the variable display result being a "big hit" in the special drawing game are controlled in the same manner as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

The time saving state is also referred to as a "high base state", "high base", etc., and the gaming state not being a time saving state is also referred to as "low base state", "low base", "non-time saving state", "non-time saving", etc. The probability variation state in which the probability variation control is performed is also called "high-accuracy state", "high-accuracy", etc., and the gaming state that is not the probability variation state is "low-probability state", "low-probability", "non-probability variation state", "non-probability variation". It is also said. The gaming state when it is in the probability changing state and the time saving state is also referred to as "highly accurate high base state", "highly accurate high base" or the like. The game state when not in the probability changing state but in the time saving state is also referred to as "low certainty high base state", "low certainty high base" or the like. The gaming state when the state is not the time saving state but the probable variation state is also referred to as “high-probability low base state”, “high-probability low base”, or the like. A state that is neither a time saving state nor a probability changing state, that is, a normal state is also called a "low accurate low base state", "low accurate low base", or the like.

In the "left", "middle", "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R provided in the image display device 905, the first special symbol game in the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol. In response to the start of one of the special figure games of the second special figure game on the display device 904B, the variable display of the decorative symbol and the display of the fourth symbol are started. In the first special figure game and the second special figure game, when the fixed special symbol which is the variable display result of the special symbol is derived and displayed, in synchronization with the timing of the derivation display, the "left" of the image display device 905, The variable display of the decorative pattern ends in the "medium" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, and at the same time, the fixed decorative pattern which is the variable display result is derived and displayed.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode. Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative design stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 constitutes a part of the big hit combination, the variation continues for the decorative design which is not yet stopped and displayed. Or a display mode in which all or some of the decorative patterns are changed in synchronization while forming all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the decorative patterns forming a predetermined jackpot combination are still displayed when stopped. The display mode in which the decorative designs are changing in the remaining decorative design display areas that are not stopped and displayed, or all or part of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 905L, 905C, 905R Is a display mode in which the decorative pattern fluctuates in synchronization while forming all or part of the big hit combination.

During the variable display of the decorative design, a character image different from the decorative design is displayed on the screen of the image display device 905, a background image is displayed, and a moving image different from the decorative design is reproduced and displayed. The performance is executed. These effects, together with the variable display of the decorative pattern itself, are referred to as effects during variable display. That is, the variable display effect is an effect produced by the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 along with the variable display of the special symbol, and is a concept including the variable display of the decorative symbol itself. In this way, the effect during variable display is executed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. Setting the variable display mode to the reach mode is also one of the effects during the variable display. In the variable display effect, in addition to the effect by the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 along with the variable display of the special symbol, the sound output operation by the speakers 908L and 908R, the lighting effect in the game effect lamp 909, and the like. Effects by, etc. may be included.

A reach effect may be executed as a part of the variable display effect. The reach effect is executed in response to the arrival of the reach mode. The reach effect is to reduce the changing speed of the decorative design, display a character image different from the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 905, change the display mode of the background image, or a video different from the decorative design. By reproducing and displaying the image or changing the variation mode of the decorative pattern, the production operation is different from that before the reach state. In this embodiment, normal reach, super reach A, and super reach B are prepared as reach effects. In this embodiment, the jackpot expectation when each reach effect is executed is higher in the order of super reach B, super reach A, and normal reach. The jackpot expectation is, for example, a ratio at which the variable display result of the special symbol is “big hit”, and here, it is also a percentage at which the variable display result of the decorative symbol is “big hit”. Hereinafter, in the case of a jackpot expectation degree of a special figure game, the jackpot expectation degree also includes a ratio at which the variable display result of the decorative pattern is “big hit”.

Further, as will be described later in detail, in this embodiment, a so-called prefetching notice is executed based on the determination at the time of winning the start prize. The pre-reading notice gives a notice of the jackpot expectation of the special figure game that is the target of the pre-reading determination. In this embodiment, as a prefetching notice, a pending change effect is prepared in which a predetermined image is applied to the target pending display image to change the display mode of the pending display image. The pending change effect is executed during execution of the variable display effect corresponding to the special figure game executed before the target. The hold change effect may be executed a plurality of times, and at this time, the hold change effect is executed once in each of a plurality of variable displays of continuous or discontinuous skipping, and the final hold display image of the target is displayed. The big hit expectation degree is announced in advance according to a typical display mode. The pre-reading notice is regarded as an effect different from the variable display effect, but may be a part of the variable display effect.

When the variable display result of the special symbol is “big hit”, the fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived and displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 as the variable display result of the decorative symbol. As an example, when the same decorative design is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the decorative design display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, a big hit combination is determined. It is sufficient if the decorative pattern is derived and displayed. In addition, the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed may be different depending on the type of jackpot.

When the variable display result of the special design is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the decorative pattern forming the predetermined non-reach combination is stopped as the variable display result of the decorative pattern. By being displayed, the fixed decorative pattern that is the non-specific display result may be displayed in a derived manner. Further, when the variable display result of the special symbol is “miss”, as the variable display result of the decorative symbol, the predetermined reach combination which is not the jackpot combination is configured after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode. When the decorative design is stopped and displayed, the fixed decorative design that is the non-specific display result may be derived and displayed.

Next, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 will be described. The main board 9011 controls the progress of the game. Then, the main board 9011 transmits an effect control command to the effect control board 9012 in accordance with the progress of the game. The effect control board 9012 performs various effects by executing effect control for controlling the image display device 905 and the like based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011. By doing so, the game executed by the main board 9011 and the various effects executed by the effect control board 9012 are synchronized. The main effect control commands will be described below with reference to FIG. 27. In addition, "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number.

The command 8001(H) is an effect control command for designating the start of the first special figure game, that is, the start of the variable display of the first special figure. The command 8002(H) is an effect control command for designating the start of the second special figure game, that is, the start of the variable display of the second special figure. The first variation start designation command and the second variation start designation command may be collectively referred to as a variation start designation command. Information indicating whether to start the variable display of the first special figure or the variable display of the second special figure may be included in the variation pattern designation command described later. The fluctuation start designation command is transmitted at the start of the special figure game.

The command 81XX(H) is a production control command for designating a variation pattern for variable display of special symbols and variable display of decorative symbols. In “XX” of the command, a numerical value corresponding to each fluctuation pattern is set. Further, the variation pattern designation command may be a command for designating the variation start of the decorative pattern. The variation pattern designation command is transmitted at the start of the special figure game.

Command 8CXX (H) is an effect control command for designating whether or not to make a big hit and a big hit type. In this embodiment, a display result designation command corresponding to each variable display result is set. For example, a numerical value corresponding to the display result is set to "XX" in the command. The display result designation command is transmitted at the start of the special figure game.

Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command that specifies the end of the special figure game. The symbol fixing designation command is to designate that the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended and the display result is derived and displayed. The symbol fixing designation command is transmitted at the end of the special figure game.

The command 95XX(H) is an effect control command for designating the background of the effect image displayed on the image display device 905. In this embodiment, the background is changed according to the game state. Therefore, the background designating command also designates the gaming state. A numerical value corresponding to the background is set to "XX" in the command. The background designation command is transmitted at a timing when the game state can be changed, when the special figure game is started, or the like.

Command A000 (H) is a production control command that specifies the start of the big hit gaming state. The fanfare is executed at the start of the big hit game state. It is an effect that notifies that the big hit game state has been reached. This command is sent at the start of the jackpot gaming state.

Command A300 (H) is a production control command that specifies the end of the jackpot gaming state. The ending is an effect that is executed at the end of the big hit game state and notifies that the big hit game state is ended. This command is sent at the end of the last round game.

Command B100 (H) is an effect control command that specifies that the first start winning due to the entry of the game medium into the first starting winning opening has occurred. The command B200 (H) is an effect control command that specifies that the second start winning due to the entry of the game medium into the second starting winning opening has occurred. The first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start prize designation command. The start winning award designation command is transmitted when the start winning award occurs.

Command C000 (H) is an effect control command that specifies that the first start prize is generated and the number of the first special figure reserved memories is increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command that specifies that the second start prize is generated and the second special figure reservation storage number is increased by one. These commands may be collectively referred to as a special figure reserved storage number addition designation command. The special figure reservation storage number addition designation command is transmitted when the start winning occurs.

Command C200 (H) is an effect control command that specifies that the number of the first special figure reservation storages is decreased by one when the first special figure game is executed. Command C300 (H) is an effect control command that specifies that the number of the second special figure pending storage is decreased by one when the second special figure game is executed. These commands may be collectively referred to as a special figure reserved storage number subtraction designation command. The special figure reservation storage number subtraction designation command is transmitted at the start of the special figure game.

Command C4XX (H) is an effect control command that specifies the determination result of the pre-reading determination at the time of starting winning. As will be described later in detail, when the first start prize or the second start prize occurs, whether or not to make a big hit, the big hit type, and random number values MR′1 to MR3′ used for determining the variation pattern are To be extracted. In this embodiment, regarding the special figure game corresponding to the extracted random number values MR1′ to MR3′, before the start condition of the special figure game is satisfied, among the extracted random number values MR1′ to MR3′. It is determined whether the variable display result of the special figure game is a "big hit" based on the random number value MR1'. The pre-reading determination means this determination, and the pre-reading determination is performed by a winning random number determination process in step S90211 described later. The determination result of the pre-reading determination is set to “XX” in the winning determination result specification command. The winning determination result designation command is transmitted when the start winning occurs.

Next, the main operation of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment will be described. The operation will be described below with reference to a flowchart and the like, but in each operation, a process or the like not shown in the flowchart may be appropriately performed.

In the main board 9011, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes predetermined processing which is, for example, game control main processing. In the game control main processing, the CPU 90103 performs necessary initial settings and the like after setting interrupt prohibition.

When the CPU 90103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC supplied every predetermined period and accepts the interrupt request, the CPU 90103 sets the interrupt disabled state, for example, a predetermined game control timer interrupt. Execute the process.

In the game control timer interrupt processing, the CPU 90103, such as switch processing, main side error processing, information output processing, game random number update processing, special symbol process processing, normal symbol process processing, command control processing, etc. in the pachinko gaming machine 901. Process for controlling the progress of the process. At the end of the game control timer interrupt process, the interrupt enable state is set. As a result, the game control timer interrupt process is executed every time a timer interrupt occurs, that is, at every predetermined time which is the supply interval of the interrupt request signal.

The switch processing is performed by determining whether the detection signals are input from various switches such as the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 via the switch circuit 90110. This is a process of determining whether the switch is turned on for each switch and storing the determination result in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102. The determination result stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102 is used in a special symbol process process or a normal symbol process process described later.

The main-side error process is a process of diagnosing an abnormality of the pachinko gaming machine 901 and enabling a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result.

The information output process is a process of outputting data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information, etc. supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example.

The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 9011 side by software. As an example, the game random numbers used on the main board 9011 side include a random number value MR1′ for determining the special figure display result, a random number value MR2′ for determining the jackpot type, and a random value MR3′ for determining the variation pattern. , And should be included.

The random number value MR1′ for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether to control the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game as the “big hit” to the big hit game state, and “0”. It can take any value from "" to "65535".

The random number value MR2′ for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used for determining the jackpot type as either “probable variation” or “non-probable variation” when the variable display result is “big jackpot”. It can take any value from 0" to "99".

The random value MR3′ for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any of a plurality of variation patterns prepared in advance, and is “0”. Can take any value from "~" to "99".

In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 90102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special symbol game is a big hit. Determination of whether or not to control the gaming state, determination of jackpot type and variation pattern, control of display operation in the special symbol display device 904 based on the determination result, big prize in the special variable winning ball device 907 in the jackpot gaming state Various processes are selected and executed in order to set the mouth opening/closing operation and the like in a predetermined procedure. Although the details of the special symbol process processing will be described later, the special symbol process processing is executed each time a timer interrupt occurs, so that the variable display result or the variation pattern is determined, the special symbol game is executed based on the result, and the jackpot gaming state. Etc. are realized.

In the normal symbol process processing, for example, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 9041, if the number of holdings does not reach the upper limit number, the general-purpose game is held and stored, or a variable display of the general-purpose game is performed using the held memory. The result and the variation pattern are determined, the display operation in the ordinary symbol display 9020 is controlled according to the variation pattern, the variable display of the ordinary symbol is executed, and the variable display result of the universal figure game is derived and displayed, and the variable display result is displayed. In the case of "universal figure hit", the processing for opening the normally variable winning ball device 906B is performed. By executing the normal symbol process processing every time the timer interrupt occurs, execution of the normal symbol game, the open state of the normal variable winning ball device 906B for a predetermined period at the time of normal symbol, etc. are realized.

The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 9011 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 9012. As an example, in the special symbol process process or the normal symbol process process, the transmission setting of the control command is performed, and in the command control process, the process of actually transmitting the control command set for transmission to the production control board 9012 is performed. Done.

Next, the special figure process processing will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 90103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S90101). FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S90101.

When the start winning determination process is started, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the first starting port switch 9022A provided corresponding to the first starting winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 906A is turned on ( Step S90201). For example, when the first start port switch 9022A is turned on when the determination result that the first start port switch 9022A is determined to be in the on state in the switch process is stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102. Just make a decision. When the first starting opening switch 9022A is turned on (step S90201; YES), whether or not the first special figure reservation storage number, which is the reservation storage number of the first special figure game, is a predetermined upper limit value. Is determined (step S90202). At this time, the CPU 90103 identifies the first special figure reservation storage number by reading the first special figure reservation storage number count value that is the stored value of the first special figure reservation storage number counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102. I wish I could. When the number of first special figure reservation storages is not the upper limit value in step S90202 (step S90202; NO), the starting mouth buffer value which is the stored value of the starting mouth buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102 is set to "1". The setting is made (step S90203).

When the first starting opening switch 9022A is off in step S90201 (step S90201; NO), and when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S90202 (step S90202; YES), It is determined whether or not the second starting port switch 9022B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 906B is turned on (step S90204). For example, when the determination result that the second starting opening switch 9022B is turned on is stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the switch processing, the second starting opening switch 9022B is turned on. Just make a decision. When it is determined that the second starting opening switch 9022B is turned on (step S90204; YES), the second special figure reservation storage number, which is the reservation storage number of the second special figure game, becomes a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not (step S90205). At this time, the CPU 90103 identifies the second special figure reservation storage number by reading the second special figure reservation storage number count value which is the stored value of the second special figure reservation storage number counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102. I wish I could. When the number of second special figure reservation storages is not the upper limit value in step S90205 (step S90205; NO), the starting port buffer value is set to "2" (step S90206). If the second starting opening switch 9022B is not turned on (step S90204; NO) or the second special figure reservation storage number is the upper limit value (step S90205; YES), the starting winning determination process is ended.

After performing either of the processes of steps S90203 and S90206, the pending storage number count value corresponding to the starting opening buffer value is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S90207). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the first special figure reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, the second special figure reservation storage number count value is set. Add one. In this way, the first special figure reserved storage number count value is updated so as to be incremented by 1 when the first starting condition for the game ball to enter the first starting winning opening is satisfied. Further, the second special figure reservation storage number count value is updated so as to be incremented by 1 when the second starting condition for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is satisfied. At this time, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102, is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S90208).

After executing the processing of step S90208, the CPU 90103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (step S90209). As an example, in the process of step S90209, among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 90104 or a random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102, the random number value MR1′ for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determining Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2' and the random number value MR3' for determining the variation pattern are extracted. Numerical data indicating each random value thus extracted is stored as reserved data by being set at the head of the empty entry in the special figure reservation storage unit according to the starting port buffer value (step S90210). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the pending data is set in the first special figure pending storage unit as shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the pending data is set in the second special figure pending storage unit as shown in FIG. 30(B). When the pending data is set in the first special figure pending storage unit, the CPU 90103 controls the first pending indicator 9025A to display a display that can specify the number of the first special figure pending storage incremented by one. You may make it carry out on the 1st reservation display 9025A. When the reservation data is set in the second special figure reservation storage unit, the CPU 90103 controls the second reservation indicator 9025B to display a display capable of specifying the number of the second special figure reservation storage incremented by one. Alternatively, the second hold indicator 9025B may be used.

The 1st special figure reservation storage section shown in FIG. 30(A) has not started yet, although the first starting prize has occurred due to the game ball entering the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A. The pending data of the first special figure game is stored. As an example, the 1st special figure reservation storage section associates with the reservation number in the winning order to the 1st starting winning opening, and the CPU 90103 extracts from the random number circuit 90104 etc. based on the establishment of the 1st starting condition due to the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1′ for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2′ for determining the big hit type, the random number value MR3′ for determining the variation pattern, etc. are set as the reserved data, and the number of storage is a predetermined upper limit value. Remember until you reach. In this embodiment, in this way, the first special figure game that has not started yet is stored as the pending storage.

The second special figure reservation storage unit shown in FIG. 30(B) has not yet started, although the game ball has entered the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B and the second starting winning has occurred. The pending data of the second special figure game which does not exist is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates with the reservation number in the winning order to the second starting winning opening, and the CPU 90103 extracts from the random number circuit 90104 or the like based on the establishment of the second starting condition due to the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1′ for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2′ for determining the big hit type, the random number value MR3′ for determining the variation pattern, etc. are set as the reserved data, and the number thereof becomes a predetermined upper limit value. Remember until you reach it. In this embodiment, in this way, the second special figure game that has not started yet is stored as the pending storage.

Then, a random number determination process at the time of winning is executed (step S90211). FIG. 31A is a flowchart showing an example of the random number value determination process at the time of winning. In the random number determination process at the time of winning, if the starting mouth buffer value is "1", the CPU 90103 first sets the transmission of the first start winning prize designation command, and then transmits the first special figure reservation storage number addition designation command. When the setting is made and the starting mouth buffer value is "2", the transmission setting of the second start winning award designation command is made and then the transmission setting of the second special figure reservation storage number addition designation command is made (step S90401).

Next, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the present is a big hit game state (step S90402). Whether or not the present is a big hit game state can be specified by, for example, the value of a special figure process flag described later. Here, if it is "4"-"7", it is a big hit game state. When the value of the special figure process flag is other than "4" to "7" and is not in the big hit game state (step S90402; NO), it is determined whether or not the present time is the time saving state (step S90403). Whether or not the present time is in the time saving state may be specified by the state of the time saving flag. When the time saving flag is ON and the time saving state is currently in progress (step S90403; YES), it is determined whether the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step S90404).

When the starting opening buffer value is “2” (step S90404; YES) or when the time saving state is not in progress (step S90403; NO), the CPU 90103 is suspended this time based on the random number value MR1′ extracted in step S90209. It is determined whether or not the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" (step S90405). In the determination, the first special figure display result determination table or the second special figure display result determination table that is referred to when determining the special figure display result at the start of the special figure game is referred to. In each of the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 33, a numerical value that is compared with the random number value MR1′ is the “big hit” or “big hit” that is the determination result. It has only to be assigned to "Loss". When the gaming state is a non-probable variation state that is not a probable variation state, the first special figure display result determination table is referenced, and when the gaming state is a probable variation state, the second special figure display result determination table is referenced. Whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation state may be specified based on the probability variation flag which is provided in the RAM 90102 and which is turned on when the probability variation state.

In step S90405, CPU 90103 sets the range of the determination value assigned to "big hit" in the first special figure display result determination table or the second special figure display result determination table as the big hit determination range. If it is the probability variation state, "8000" to "9899" is set as the big hit determination range, and if it is the non-probability variation state, "8000" to "8189" is set as the big hit determination range. Then, it is determined whether or not the random number value MR1′ of this time is within the set jackpot determination range.

When it is determined that the random number value MR1′ of this time is within the jackpot determination range and the special figure display result of the special figure game held this time is “big hit” (step S90405; YES), the big hit is designated as the determination result. The transmission setting of the winning determination result designation command is performed (step S90406). Since "02" of the EXT data is set in the jackpot determination result (see FIG. 31B), transmission setting of the winning determination result designation command including the data in the EXT data is performed.

When it is determined that the random number value MR1′ is not within the jackpot determination range and the special figure display result of the special figure game that has been held this time is “miss” (step S90405; NO), when the winning is specified as the decision result The transmission setting of the determination result designation command is performed (step S90407). Since "01" of the EXT data is set in the loss determination result (see FIG. 31B), the transmission setting of the winning determination result designation command including the data in the EXT data is performed.

If the value of the special figure process flag is "4" to "7" and the jackpot is in the gaming state (step S90402; YES), or if the starting opening buffer value is "1" (step S90404; NO), the prefetch notice is issued. In order to limit the execution of the above, the transmission setting of the winning determination result specification command that specifies no determination as the determination result is performed (step S90408). As a result, execution of the prefetching notice is restricted on the side of the effect control board 9012. Since "00" of the EXT data is set in the determination result of no determination (see FIG. 31B), transmission setting of the winning determination result specification command including the data in the EXT data is performed.

By limiting the execution of the pre-reading effect for the first start winning in the time saving state and the start winning in the big hit game state, it is possible to prevent the pre-reading effect from being executed at an inappropriate timing.

After steps S90406, S90407, and S90408, the winning random number determination process ends.

It should be noted that one set of each command set to be transmitted in the processing is collectively transmitted as a command at the time of starting winning and winning in the subsequent command control processing. The set of the first start winning award designation command, the first special figure reserved memory number addition designation command, and the winning judgment result designation command is referred to as a first start winning award command, the second starting award designation command, the second special figure hold A set of the memory number addition designation command and the winning determination result designation command is called a second start winning command.

Returning to FIG. 31, after the winning random number determination process of step S9021, the CPU 90103 determines whether the starting opening buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S90212). At this time, if the starting mouth buffer value is "2" (step S90212; "2"), the starting mouth buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S90213), and then the winning a prize for starting. The determination process ends. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "1" (step S90212; "1"), the starting opening buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S90214), The process proceeds to step S90204. As a result, even when both the first starting port switch 9022A and the second starting port switch 9022B simultaneously detect the starting winning of the effective game ball, the processing based on the detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S90101 shown in FIG. 28, the CPU 90103 selects one of the processes of steps S90110 to S90117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102. To execute.

The special symbol normal process of step S90110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0". FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S90110 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation storage number is "0" (step S90231). The CPU 90103 may determine whether or not the second special figure reservation storage number count value is “0”.

When the number of second special figure pending storage is other than "0" in step S90231 (step S90231; NO), the pending data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102, for example, the head area of the second special figure pending storage unit. Numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is read out (step S90232). As a result, the game random number extracted in response to the occurrence of the starting winning at the second starting winning opening in the process of step S90209 is read. The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, by being stored in a fluctuation random number buffer or the like.

Following the processing of step S90232, the second special figure reservation storage number is updated by subtracting 1 from the second special figure reservation storage count value, and the second special figure is updated. The contents stored in the hold storage unit are shifted (step S90233). For example, the pending data stored in the storage area lower than the pending number “1” in the second special figure pending storage unit is shifted upward by one entry. In addition, in the processing of step S90233, the total number of pending storages may be updated by subtracting one. Then, the variable special map designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102, is updated to "2" (step S90234).

When the second special figure reservation storage number is "0" in step S90231 (step S90231; YES), it is determined whether the first special figure reservation storage number is "0" (step S90235). The CPU 90103 may determine whether or not the first special figure reservation storage number count value is “0”. Thus, the process of step S90235 is executed when it is determined in step S90231 that the second special figure pending storage number is "0", and the first special figure pending storage number is "0". Or not. As a result, the second special figure game is started to be executed with priority over the first special figure game.

When the number of the first special figure reservation storages is other than "0" in step S90235 (step S90235; NO), the reservation data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102, for example, the head area of the first special figure reservation storage unit. Numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is read out (step S90236). As a result, the game random number extracted in response to the occurrence of the starting winning at the first starting winning opening in the process of step S90209 is read. The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, by being stored in a fluctuation random number buffer or the like.

Subsequent to the process of step S90236, the first special figure reservation storage number is updated by subtracting 1 from the first special figure reservation storage number, and the first special figure reservation storage number is decremented by 1. The contents stored in the hold storage unit are shifted (step S90237). For example, the pending data stored in the storage area lower than the pending number “1” in the first special figure pending storage unit is shifted upward by one entry. In addition, in the process of step S90237, the total number of pending storages may be updated by subtracting one. Then, the fluctuation special map designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S90238).

After performing either of the processing of steps S90234 and S90238, the special symbol display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol is determined to be either "big hit" or "miss" (step S90239). As an example, in the process of step S90239, the special figure display result determination table prepared by storing it in a predetermined area of the ROM 90101 in advance is selected and set as the use table for determining the special figure display result. For example, the CPU 90103 sets the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 33(A) as a use table when the current state is the non-probability variation state, and sets the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 33(B) when the current state is the non-probability variation state. 2 Set the special figure display result determination table as the use table. In each special figure display result determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 33, a numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR1′ for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the “big hit” or “miss” as the determination result. If you have.

The CPU 90103 reads out the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1′ for determining the special figure display result contained in the random numbers for playing temporarily stored in the random number buffer for fluctuations in step S90232 or S90236 from the random number buffer for fluctuations, and reads the random number value MR1. Based on the numerical data indicating', the first or second special figure display result determination table set as the use table is referred to, and the random number value MR1' is matched in the referred first or second special figure display result determination table. The “big hit” or “miss” assigned to the determined value may be determined as the current special figure display result. When the random number MR1' is "9000" and the probability variation flag is in the ON state, the CPU 90103 refers to the second special figure display result determination table and determines that the special figure display result is "big hit". When the probability variation flag is in the off state, it is determined that the special figure display result is set to "miss" by referring to the first special figure display result determination table.

As shown in FIG. 33, in the probability variation state, the special figure display result is determined as “big hit” at a higher determination rate than in the non-probability variation state. Therefore, for example, by the big hit ending process of step S90117 shown in FIG. 28, the probability change flag is set to the ON state corresponding to the case where the big hit type is “probability change”, and the present is the probability change state. Sometimes, the special figure display result is more likely to be a "big hit" than in the non-probability change state, and is likely to be a big hit game state. That is, when the current state is the probability change state, it is advantageous for the player.

After that, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined by the process of step S90239 is “big hit” (step S90240). When the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" (step S90240; YES), the big hit flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 is set to the on state (step S90241). Further, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S90242). As an example, in the process of step S90242, a jackpot type determination table prepared by storing it in a predetermined area of ROM 90101 in advance is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type. The CPU 90103 sets, for example, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 34 as a usage table. In the jackpot type determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 34, a numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR2′ for jackpot type determination may be assigned to “non-probability variation” or “probability variation” as the determination result. ..

The CPU 90103 reads out numerical data indicating the random number value MR2′ for determining the big hit type included in the random numbers for playing temporarily stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation in step S90232 or S90236 from the random number buffer for fluctuations, and reads it from the random number buffer for fluctuations. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2' for jackpot type determination, the jackpot type determination table set in the usage table is referred to and assigned to the determination value that matches the random number value MR2' in the referred jackpot type determination table. The “non-probability change” or “probability change” may be determined as the type of big hit this time.

After executing the process of step S90242, the determined jackpot type is stored (step S90243). The CPU 90103 may store the jackpot type by storing a jackpot type buffer setting value indicating the determination result of the jackpot type in a jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102.

If the special figure display result is not a "big hit" (step S90240; NO), or after step S90243, the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result of the special symbols in the special figure game is determined (step S90244). As an example, when it is determined in step S90240 that the special symbol display result is not a “big hit”, a special symbol predetermined as a lost symbol is determined as a confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S90240 that the special symbol display result is "big hit", which of the special symbols is predetermined as a plurality of kinds of big hit symbols according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S90242. It may be decided as a definite special symbol.

After executing the processing of step S90244, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to "1" (step S90245), the special symbol normal processing is ended. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1" in step S90245, and the next timer interrupt occurs, the fluctuation pattern setting process of step S90111 is executed.

In step S90235, if the number of reserved memories of the first special figure game is "0" (step S90235; YES), a predetermined demo display setting is made (step S90246), and then the special symbol normal processing is ended. .. In this demo display setting, has the main board 9011 transmitted to the effect control board 9012 the effect control command for designating the start of the demonstration display by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 905, for example? Determine whether or not. At this time, if it has been transmitted, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the demo display start designation command is transmitted and set, and then the demo display setting is ended. When the demonstration display start designation command is transmitted, the production control board 9012 displays the demo screen.

The variation pattern setting process of step S90111 of FIG. 28 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S90111 as the variation pattern setting processing. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step S90261). When the big hit flag is on (step S90261; YES), the big hit variation pattern is determined with reference to the big hit variation pattern determination table (step S90262). When the big hit flag is off (step S90261; NO), the variation pattern for loss is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table for loss (step S90263).

FIG. 36 shows a specific example of the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, variation patterns PA1′-1, PA2′-1, PA3′-2 to PA3′-4 are prepared as variation patterns at the time of loss. Also, as the big hit variation patterns, variation patterns PB3'-2 to PB3'-4 are prepared.

The variation patterns PA1′-1 and PA2′-1 of the loss-time variation patterns are non-reach variation patterns that specify non-reach. The fluctuation pattern PA2'-1 is a non-reach fluctuation pattern for time saving in which the special figure fluctuation time is shorter than usual. The variation patterns PA3'-2 to PA3'-4 of the variation patterns at the time of loss are reach variation patterns that specify the reach. The variation pattern PA3′-2 is a reach variation pattern that specifies execution of normal reach. The variation pattern PA3′-3 is a reach variation pattern that specifies the execution of the normal reach and the evolution to the super reach A. The variation pattern PA3′-4 is a reach variation pattern that specifies the execution of normal reach to evolve to super reach B.

The variation pattern PB3′-2 of the variation pattern at the time of big hit is a reach variation pattern that specifies execution of normal reach. The variation pattern PB3′-3 is a reach variation pattern that specifies the execution of the normal reach to evolve to the super reach A. The variation pattern PB3′-4 is a reach variation pattern that specifies that the execution of the normal reach is expanded to the super reach B.

In step S90262, for example, the jackpot variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 37, in the big hit variation pattern determination table, a numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR3′ for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to any of the big hit variation patterns as the determination result. In step S90262, the CPU 90103 refers to the jackpot variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination random number MR3′ read from the variation random number buffer, and refers to the jackpot variation pattern determination table. Any of the fluctuation patterns PB3′-2 to PB3′-4 assigned to the determination value that matches the random number value MR3′ may be determined as the current big hit time fluctuation pattern.

Note that in FIG. 37, the determination rate is described instead of the range of the determination value. In the actual table, it is sufficient that the determined values in the range according to the determined ratio in FIG. 37 are assigned to each variation pattern. For example, in FIG. 37, the determination rate of the variation pattern PB3′-2 is 10/100, the determination rate of the variation pattern PB3′-3 is 20/100, and the determination rate of the variation pattern PB3′-4 is 70/. Since it is 100, the variation patterns PB3′-2 are assigned the determination values 0 to 9 that are compared with the random number value MR3′, and the variation patterns PB3′-3 are the determination values 10 to 29 that are compared with the random number value MR3′. The variation patterns PB3'-4 are assigned the decision values 30 to 99 to be compared with the random number value MR3'. The same applies to the other tables in which the determined ratio is described.

In step S90263, when the current game state is the non-time saving state, the first variation pattern determination table for loss shown in FIG. 38(A) is referred to. When the current game state is the time saving state, the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 38B is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 38, in the first to second variation pattern determination patterns for loss, for example, the numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR3′ for determining the variation pattern is one of the variation patterns at the time of loss as the determination result. It only needs to be assigned. In step S90263, the CPU 90103 determines which of the first or second variation pattern determination table for use as a use pattern, based on the numerical value data indicating the variation pattern determination random number MR3′ read from the variation random number buffer. Which of the fluctuation patterns PA1′-1, PA3′-2 to PA3′-4 is assigned to the determination value that matches the random number value MR3′ in the first or second variation pattern determination table for reference that is referred to? Alternatively, any one of the fluctuation patterns PA2′-1, PA3′-2 to PA3′-4 may be determined as the present loss-time fluctuation pattern.

In the variation pattern determination table for loss shown in FIG. 38, the variation pattern PA2′-1 with a short special figure variation time is easily selected in the time saving state, and in the time saving state, it is more average than in the non-time saving state. The variable display time can be shortened to suppress the generation of invalid starting winnings, and the player's stoppage of the game ball can be reduced. In addition, the frequency of execution of variable display can be increased.

37 and 38, in the case of a big hit, a variation pattern PB3'-4 that executes super reach B, a variation pattern PB3'-3 that executes super reach A, and a variation pattern PB3'-2 that executes normal reach, in that order. The decision rate is high. The level of determination rate of each fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is the opposite. Therefore, when Super Reach B is executed, the variable display result is "big hit" at the highest rate. Then, in the order of super reach A and normal reach, the rate at which the variable display result is "big hit" decreases.

After executing step S90262 or S90263, the special figure variation time which is the variable display time of the special symbol is set (step S90264). The special symbol variation time which is the variable display time of the special symbol is a time required from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game to the derivation display of the fixed special symbol which is the variable display result. The special figure variation time is designated by each variation pattern, and the CPU 90103 sets the special figure variation time designated by the variation pattern selected in the process of step S90262 or S90263 to change the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol. The timing at which the display result is derived can be set. The special figure variation time is set by, for example, setting a timer value according to the special figure variation time in a game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102.

Following the processing of step S90264, of the first special figure game on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special figure game on the second special symbol display device 904B, any special figure game in which the start condition is satisfied The setting for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol is performed so as to start (step S90265). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure on the first special symbol display device 904A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 904B is performed. When the first special figure game is started, the CPU 90103 controls the first pending display 9025A to display a display capable of specifying the subtracted number of the first special figure pending storage by one. May be performed. In addition, when starting the second special figure game, the CPU 90103 controls the second pending display 9025B to display a display capable of specifying the subtracted second special figure pending storage number by one. May be performed.

After that, in order to notify the effect control board 9012 side of the special figure display result, the variation pattern determination result, and the like, the command transmission setting at the start of variation of the special symbol is performed (step S90266). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the variation start command corresponding to the first special figure game is the first variation start designation command, variation pattern designation command, display result designation command, background designation command. , The transmission setting for sequentially transmitting the first special figure reserved storage number subtraction designation command is performed. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the variation start command corresponding to the second special figure game is the second variation start designation command, the variation pattern designation command, the display result designation command, and the background designation command. , The transmission setting for sequentially transmitting the second special figure reserved storage number subtraction designation command is performed. These commands are sequentially transmitted by one timer interrupt in the subsequent command control processing.

After the process of step S90266 is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2" (step S90267), and the fluctuation pattern setting process is ended. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "2" in step S90267, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the special symbol variation process of step S90112 is executed.

The special symbol variation process of step S90112 of FIG. 28 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In the special symbol variation process, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time set in step S90111 has elapsed. For example, whether or not the special figure fluctuation time has elapsed by subtracting 1 from the timer value of the game control process timer whose initial value is set in step S90111 and determining whether the subtracted timer value has become “0” It may be determined whether or not. When the timer value of the game control process timer is not 0, the special figure fluctuation time has not elapsed, so the control for executing the variable display of the special figure in the special figure game is performed and the first special symbol display device 904A or A process for changing the special symbol is performed in the second special symbol display device 904B, and the special symbol variation process is ended. On the other hand, the timer value of the game control process timer becomes 0, and when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display The control to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol in the device 904B is performed, and the fixed special symbol which is the variable display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the transmission of the symbol finalization designation command is set, and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to "3." Update to ". By repeating step S90112 when the timer interrupt occurs, variable display of the special symbol, derivation display of the fixed special symbol, and the like are realized.

The special symbol stop process of step S90113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 90103 determines whether the big hit flag is in the on state. When the big hit flag is in the on state, the time saving flag and the probability variation flag are reset, and the count value of the time saving number for counting the remaining number of variable displays executed during the time saving state provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 is set. A process of resetting to "0" is performed. Then, the game control process timer is set with the timer value corresponding to the fanfare waiting time as an initial value. Then, "15" is set as an initial value in the round number counter for counting the round games provided in the RAM 90102. After that, the setting for transmitting the hit start designation command is made, the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", and the special symbol stop processing is ended. Since the game state may be changed here, the background designation command may be set to be transmitted.

When the big hit flag is off, it is determined whether the time saving flag is in the on state, and when it is on, the count value of the time saving counter is decremented by "1". After that, it is determined whether the count value after subtracting “1” is “0”, and when the count value is “0”, the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied. To end the process, the time saving flag is turned off. Then, the transmission setting for transmitting the background designation command is performed based on the state of the probability variation flag. When the time saving flag is off, when the count value after subtracting "1" is not "0", or after setting the background designation command transmission, the value of the special process flag is updated to "0", etc. The special symbol stop process ends.

The big hit opening preprocessing in step S90114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". In this jackpot opening preprocessing, for example, the timer value of the game control process timer is subtracted. If the timer value after the subtraction is not "0", it means that the fanfare waiting time has not yet elapsed, so the jackpot opening preprocessing is ended. If the timer value after the subtraction is "0", the fanfare wait time has elapsed, and it is the timing to start the round game. In this case, start the round game in the big hit game state and open the special winning opening, set the timer value corresponding to the upper limit of the period of opening the big winning opening in the game control process timer Processing and so on are executed. When processing such as opening the special winning opening is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". By repeating step S90114 each time a timer interrupt occurs, waiting for the start timing of the round game, opening of the special winning opening, and the like are realized.

The big hit opening process in step S90115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit open process, the process of subtracting 1 from the timer value of the game control process timer, the timer value after subtracting 1, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023 in one round game, and the like. Based on this, a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state is included.

When it is determined that the timer value after subtracting 1 has become 0 or the number of detected game balls has reached the predetermined number, it is time to close the special winning opening, so the big winning opening is closed. The process of returning to, the process of setting the timer value corresponding to the closing time of the special winning opening in the game control process timer, the process of subtracting 1 from the count value of the round number counter, and the like are executed. If the timer value after subtracting 1 has not become 0 and the number of detected game balls has not reached the predetermined number, processing such as maintaining the special winning opening in an open state is performed to open the big jackpot. Medium processing ends. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", and the big hit opening process is ended.

By repeating step S90115 each time a timer interruption occurs, the open state of the special winning opening is maintained until the timing of returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state, and finally the special winning opening is closed.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S90116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". In this jackpot opening post-processing, there is processing for determining whether or not the count value of the round number counter has become "0", processing for reducing the timer value of the game control process timer by 1 when the count value has not become "0", and the like. Done.

When it is determined that the count value of the round number counter is “0”, the round game has reached the upper limit number of times, so the timer value corresponding to the ending waiting time doctor is set in the game control process timer. Set to timer. Also, the hit end designation command is set to be transmitted, and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7".

If the timer value of the game control process timer is decremented by 1, it is determined whether the timer value after decrementing by 1 is 0, and if it is not 0, it is not the start timing of the round game, so the closed state Is maintained and the processing after the jackpot opening ends. If it is 0, it is the start timing of the round game, so the process of opening the special winning opening, the timer value corresponding to the upper limit of the period of opening the special winning opening is set in the game control process timer Processing and so on are executed. The value of the special figure process flag is set to "5" when the process of opening the special winning opening is executed.

Each round game is realized by repeatedly executing S90115 and S90116 for each timer interrupt after the special winning opening is opened in step S90114.

The big hit ending process of step S90117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". In the big hit ending process, a process of reducing the timer value of the game control process timer by 1, and the like are performed. If the timer value decremented by 1 is not 0, the ending has not ended, so the jackpot ending process is ended. When the timer value decremented by 1 becomes 0, the ending ends, so the states of the time saving flag, the time saving counter, the probability variation flag, etc. are set according to the big hit type stored in the big hit type buffer.

For example, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the jackpot type is “probable change”, and if it is a probable change, the time saving flag and the probability changing flag are turned on, and the count initial value is set in the time saving counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102. Is set to "100". If the jackpot type is "non-probable change", only the time saving flag is turned on, and "100" is set as the count initial value in the time saving counter. After that, the game control process timer, the jackpot type buffer set value, various data such as the state of various flags are appropriately reset, and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

Next, the main operation of the effect control board 9012 will be described.

In the effect control board 9012, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 90120 is activated to execute, for example, predetermined effect control main processing. When the effect control main process is started, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes a predetermined initialization process to clear the RAM 90122, set various initial values, and set the CTC register mounted on the effect control board 9012. I do. After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122 is turned on. The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time elapses based on, for example, the register setting of the CTC in the timer interrupt process executed separately from the effect control main process. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, it waits. Therefore, command analysis processing, effect control process processing, and the like, which will be described later, are executed each time a timer interrupt occurs.

In addition, on the side of the effect control board 9012, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 9011 occurs in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 9011 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disabled state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order. The effect control CPU 90120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, among the input ports included in the I/O 90125, a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015 is a control signal to be a production control command. Take in. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 90122. After that, the production control CPU 90120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on, the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state and the command analysis process is executed. In the command analysis process, for example, the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer is read and analyzed, and settings and control corresponding to the analysis result are performed. To do.

After executing the command analysis process, the effect control process process is executed. In the effect control process processing, the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices are determined, determined, and set according to the effect control commands and the like transmitted from the main board 9011. Following the effect control process processing, effect random number updating processing is executed. In the production random number updating process, numerical data indicating the production random numbers counted by the random counter of the RAM 90122 are updated by software as various random number values used for production control. After that, the determination as to whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on is executed again.

Next, the command analysis process will be described. In the command analysis process, the received command stored in the effect control command reception buffer is analyzed, which effect control command the received command is specified, and processing is performed according to the specified effect control command. When a plurality of reception commands are stored in the effect control command reception buffer, analysis or the like is performed for each reception command.

FIG. 39 shows the relationship between the effect control command specified by the analysis and the processing content corresponding to the effect control command. Each command reception flag and each command storage area in FIG. 39 is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122. Setting each command reception flag means turning the flag on. The state of each command reception flag and the command stored in each command storage area may be reset or erased at an appropriate timing. The first start prize-winning command buffer and the second start prize-winning command buffer are also provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122.

As shown in FIG. 40(A), a hold display number serving as a buffer number is set in the first start prize-winning command buffer. A set of commands including a first start winning award designation command, a first special figure reserved memory number addition designation command, and a winning determination result designation command is a storage area corresponding to the first reserved display numbers "1" to "4". Are stored in order from the beginning of the free area in.

As shown in FIG. 40(B), a hold display number serving as a buffer number is set in the second start prize-winning command buffer. A set of commands consisting of the second start winning award designation command, the second special figure reserved storage number addition designation command, and the winning judgment result designation command is a storage area corresponding to the second reserved display numbers "1" to "4". Are stored in order from the beginning of the free area in.

The winning determination result designation command is stored in the first start prize command buffer when the first start winning designation command reception flag is on, and the second start winning designation command reception flag is on the second start. It is stored in the command buffer when winning. In one start prize, the start prize designation command is transmitted before the prize determination result designation command, so depending on the state of the first start prize designation command reception flag or the second start prize designation command reception flag. By specifying the storage location of the start winning award designating command, each command of the first start winning award command transmitted from the main board 9011 when the first starting award winning occurs is stored as one set in the first start award winning command buffer. Then, each command of the start winning prize commands transmitted from the main board 9011 when the second starting prize is generated is stored as one set in the second starting prize command buffer.

Further, each of the 1-1 to 1-4 winning prize determination result designation command reception flags in FIG. 39 is provided corresponding to each of the reserved display numbers “1” to “4” of the first start winning command buffer. Therefore, when the winning determination result designation command is stored in the first start winning command buffer, the winning determination result stored in the reception flag among the 1-1 to 1-4 winning determination result designation command reception flags The flag corresponding to the pending display number of the specified command is turned on. For example, when the winning determination result designation command is stored in correspondence with the hold display number “1”, the 1-1st winning determination result designation command reception flag is turned on and the hold display number “2” is stored. When the prize-winning determination result designating command is stored, the 1-2 win-winning determination result designating command reception flag is turned on, and when the prize-winning determination result designating command is stored corresponding to the hold display number "3", When the 1-3 winning award determination result designation command reception flag is turned on and the winning award determination result designation command is stored in correspondence with the hold display number “4”, the 1-4 winning award determination result designation command reception flag is set. Turn on.

Each of the 2-1 to 2-4 winning prize determination result designation command reception flags in FIG. 39 is provided corresponding to each of the hold display numbers “1” to “4” of the second start winning prize command buffer. , When the winning determination result designation command is stored in the second start winning command buffer, the winning determination result designation command stored this time among the 2-1 to 2-4 winning determination result reception commands The flag corresponding to the hold display number of is turned on. For example, when the winning determination result designation command is stored corresponding to the hold display number "1", the 2-1st prize determination result designation command reception flag is set to the ON state, and the hold display number "2" is associated. When the winning determination result specification command is stored, the 2-2 winning determination result specification command reception flag is turned on, and when the winning determination result specification command is stored corresponding to the hold display number "3", 2-3 When the winning judgment result designation command reception flag is turned on and the winning judgment result designation command is stored corresponding to the hold display number “4”, the 2-4 winning judgment result designation command reception flag is set. Turn on.

It should be noted that the 1-1 to 1-4 winning award determination result designation commands and the 2-1 to 2-4 award winning determination result designation commands may be collectively referred to as a winning determination result designation command.

Since the winning determination result designation command is transmitted last in one start winning command, it is determined whether or not a new start winning command is received depending on the state of each winning determination result designation command reception flag. Alternatively, it is possible to specify which of the reserved display numbers of the first start prize-winning command buffer and the second start prize-winning command buffer the newly received start prize-winning command is stored.

Since the first start prize command is transmitted from the main board 9011 in response to the occurrence of the hold of the first special figure game, when the hold of the first special figure game is generated, it is stored in the first start prize command buffer. One set of received commands to be stored is increased by one. Since the command for the second start prize is transmitted from the main board 9011 in response to the occurrence of the hold of the second special figure game, in response to the occurrence of the hold of the second special figure game, the command for the second start prize is given. One set of received commands stored in the command buffer increases by one.

Further, as will be described later in detail, when the first special figure game is executed, the first start prize-winning commands stored in correspondence with the first reserved display numbers “2” to “4” are respectively assigned to the higher-ranked numbers. 1 Reserved display numbers are shifted to "1" to "3". Further, when the second special figure game is executed, the second start prize-winning commands stored in correspondence with the second hold display numbers "2" to "4" are respectively the second hold display numbers "1" of higher ranks. ] To "3".

With the above-described configuration, the hold display number of the first start prize command buffer and the hold number of the first special figure hold storage unit are stored in correspondence with the same number, and the first start prize command and hold data are stored. The number of first start-up winning prize commands stored in the first start-up winning prize command buffer is the same as the number of first special-drawing reserved memories of the first special-drawing game. In addition, the holding display number of the second start winning award command buffer and the holding number of the second special figure holding storage unit are stored corresponding to the same number, and the second starting winning award command and the holding data correspond. Therefore, the number of the second start prize-winning commands stored in the second start prize-winning command buffer becomes the same as the number of the second special figure reserved storages of the second special figure game.

In addition, each hold display number in the first start prize-winning command buffer and the second start prize-winning command buffer also corresponds to each display position of the hold display image. Specifically, each hold display number of the command buffer at the time of the first start winning a prize corresponds to each display position of the first hold display image provided in the area 905HA of the display area 905H, and the hold display number "1" is Corresponding to the leftmost display position in the area 905HA, the reserved display number "2" corresponds to the second display position from the left in the area 905HA, and the reserved display number "3" is the third display position from the left in the area 905HA. The hold display number “4” corresponds to the fourth display position from the left in the area 905HA. Further, each hold display number of the second start winning award command buffer corresponds to each display position of the second hold display image provided in the area 905HB of the display area 905H, and the hold display number "1" in the area 905HB. Corresponding to the leftmost display position, the hold display number “2” corresponds to the second display position from the left in the area 905HB, and the hold display number “3” corresponds to the third display position from the left in the area 905HB. The reserved display number “4” corresponds to the fourth display position from the left in the area 905HB.

Further, the pending change effect execution pattern and the action effect execution pattern are stored in the first start prize-winning command buffer and the second start prize-winning command buffer, respectively. The hold change effect execution pattern, which will be described in detail later, specifies the execution pattern of the hold change effect, and is stored in correspondence with the start winning command at the target special figure game of the hold change effect. .. Similarly, the action effect execution pattern is for designating the execution pattern of the action effect, and is stored in association with the command for start-up winning corresponding to the special figure game of the target of the action effect.

In the start winning command buffer of FIG. 40, "0000 (H)" indicates that no command is stored, and "-" stores both the pending change effect execution pattern and the effect effect execution pattern. Indicates that it has not been done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 39, in the command analysis process, when the background designating command is received, the state of the high-accuracy flag or the state of the high base flag is switched according to the background designated by the background designating command.

Next, the production control process processing will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of effect control process processing. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 41, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes the pending change effect setting process (step S90161), and then, in accordance with the value of the effect process flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90122. One of the processes of steps S90170 to S90175 as described above is selected and executed.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the pending change effect setting process. In the pending change effect setting process, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not a new start winning command has been received this time (step S90671). For example, if any of the 1-1 to 1-4 winning award determination result designation command reception flag and the 2-1 to 2-4 award winning determination result designation command reception flag are in the ON state, it is started. Since the winning command is newly stored in the first starting winning command buffer or the second starting winning command buffer, it is determined that a new starting winning command is received. In addition, when a plurality of flags among the above winning determination result designation command reception flags are in the ON state, the second start winning command with the largest hold display number is the "newly received starting winning command. As described below, the start winning award command of the hold display number corresponding to each of the plurality of flags that are turned on is set as the "newly received start winning award command" and the following process is executed for each command. You may do it. Of the first start prize command and the second start prize command stored in the first start prize command buffer and the second start prize command buffer, which start prize command is “newly received start prize command Can be specified by which of the winning determination result designation command reception flags that are in the on state. For example, if the 1-3rd winning award determination result designation command reception flag is on, the first starting award command stored in the reserved display number "3" of the first starting award command buffer is "newly received. When the command for the second winning award determination result reception command is ON, the second starting award command stored in the reserved display number “2” of the second starting award command buffer is displayed. The command becomes the "newly received command at the time of starting prize".

When there is no new start winning award command received (step S90671; NO), because both the first winning award determination result specifying command reception flag and the second award determination result specification command receiving flag are off, etc. Since the pending change effect setting is not executed, the pending change effect setting process ends.

If a new start winning command is received (step S90671; YES), it is determined whether the hold display number corresponding to the newly received starting winning command is “1” (step S90672), and the new If the hold display number corresponding to the start winning command at the time of receiving is not "1" (step S90672; NO), the winning determination result specification command included in the newly received starting winning command is "no determination. Is specified as the determination result (step S90673).

When the winning determination result specification command does not specify "no determination" as the determination result (step S90673; NO), the pending change effect execution pattern is stored in the first start prize command buffer and the second start prize command buffer. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the action effect execution pattern is stored (step S90674). If neither the hold change effect execution pattern nor the action effect execution pattern is stored (step S90674: NO), the hold change effect Whether to execute or not is determined (step S90675). In step S90675, for example, the presence or absence of execution of the pending change effect is determined at a determination rate as shown in FIG.

In step S90675, the effect control CPU 90120 first extracts numerical data indicating a random number value SR1′ for determining whether or not to execute the pending change effect, which is updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter. Then, based on the random number value SR1', the presence/absence of execution of the pending change effect is determined by referring to the pending change effect execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121. In the pending change effect execution determination table, for example, a numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR1′ becomes a determination result in a range different depending on the winning determination result designated by the winning determination result designation command It may be assigned to the determination result of “no execution”. If the determination result assigned to the determination value that matches the random number value SR1′ extracted this time in accordance with the winning determination result is “execution” in the hold change effect execution determination table, the effect control CPU 90120 causes the hold change effect. Is determined to be executed, and if "no execution", it is determined not to execute the pending change effect.

As can be seen from the determination rate of FIG. 43, when the winning determination result is “big hit”, the pending change effect is easier to be executed than when the winning determination result is “miss”. On the other hand, when the winning determination result is “miss”, the opposite is true. Therefore, when the hold change effect is executed, the jackpot expectation degree of the variable display of the target is higher than when the effect is not executed.

After that, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the effect effect is executed (step S90676). Here, the action effect is an effect of whether or not a predetermined image acts on the hold display image. The action effect includes an action success effect in which a predetermined image acts on the hold display image and an action failure effect in which the predetermined image does not act on the hold display image.

In this embodiment, as an action effect, the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated so that the image of the arrow shot by the predetermined character displayed on the sub-image display device 9051 acts on the hold display image. Perform the effect of no. In this embodiment, an arrow shot by a predetermined character displayed on the sub-image display device 9051 hits the reserved display image with a success effect, and a predetermined character displayed on the sub-image display device 9051 shoots the arrow. It is possible to execute an action failure effect in which the arrow does not hit the hold display image. When the action success effect is executed, the hold change effect is executed and the mode of the hold display image is changed, and when the action failure effect is executed, the hold change effect is not executed and the hold display image is executed. Does not change.

In step S90676, for example, the presence/absence of execution of the action effect is determined at a determination rate as shown in FIG.

In step S90676, the effect control CPU 90120 first extracts numerical data indicating a random number value SR2′ for determining whether or not to execute the action effect, which is updated by the random number circuit 90124, the effect random counter, or the like. Then, based on the random number value SR2', the presence/absence of execution of the action effect is determined by referring to the action effect execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121. In the action effect execution determination table, for example, the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR2′ is the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is [2] or [3] or [4]. It is only necessary to be assigned to the determination result of “execution performed” or “no execution” as a determination result in a different range depending on whether or not the hold change effect is executed. In the effect production execution determination table, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is [2] in the determined value that matches the random number value SR2′ extracted this time [3]. ] Or [4] and whether or not the pending change effect is executed, the effect effect is determined to be executed if the decision result is “executed”, and the effect effect is determined if “not executed”. Decide not to execute.

As can be seen from the determination rate of FIG. 44, when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received command at the time of start winning is [2], the action effect is not executed. Further, when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received command at the time of starting winning is [3] or [4], when the hold change effect is "execution", when the hold change effect is "no execution" The effect production is easier to execute. On the other hand, when the pending change effect is "no execution", the opposite is true. Therefore, when the effect effect is executed, the degree of expectation that the hold change effect is executed is higher than when the effect effect is not executed.

After that, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the hold change effect in step S90675 (step S90677), and if it is executed (step S90677; YES), the hold change effect is a pattern to be executed. The hold change effect execution pattern is determined (step S90678). If it is determined in step S90676 that the action effect is not executed, in step S90678, the pending change effect execution pattern is determined at a determination rate as shown in FIG. 45, for example. Specifically, when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received command at the time of starting winning is "2", the hold change effect pattern is determined at the determination rate as shown in FIG. 45(A). Further, when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start-up winning command is "3", the hold change effect execution pattern is determined at the determination rate as shown in FIG. 45(B). Further, when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is "4", the hold change effect execution pattern is determined at the determination rate as shown in FIG. 45(C).

The hold change effect execution pattern is stored in the first start prize-winning command buffer or the second start prize-winning command buffer as described above, but the special figure game before the target is executed together with the corresponding start prize-winning command. When the number is displayed, it is shifted to the upper part of the hold display number. The hold change effect execution pattern without action effect specifies the hold display number when executing the hold change effect and the mode of change of the hold display image at that time, and the hold change effect execution pattern HP1′. -1 to HP1'-2, HP2'-1 to HP2'-2, HP3'-1 to HP3'-2 are prepared.

For example, the hold change effect execution pattern HP1′-1 executes the hold change effect in the variable display executed when the hold change effect execution pattern is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the hold display number [1]. It is a hold change effect execution pattern that changes the display color of the hold display image of the target from white to green.

For example, the hold change effect execution pattern HP2′-2 executes the hold change effect in the variable display executed when the hold change effect execution pattern is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the hold display number [2]. In the variable display executed when the display color of the target hold display image is changed from white to green and the hold change effect execution pattern is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the hold display number [1], the hold change effect is again displayed. Is executed to change the display color of the target hold display image from green to red.

For example, the hold change effect execution pattern HP3′-1 executes the hold change effect in the variable display executed when the hold change effect execution pattern is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the hold display number [3]. In the variable display executed when the display color of the target hold display image is changed from white to green and the hold change effect execution pattern is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the hold display numbers [2] and [1]. Is a hold change effect execution pattern in which the display color of the target hold display image remains green without executing the hold change effect again.

If it is determined in step S90676 that the action effect is to be executed, in step S90678, the pending change effect execution pattern is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 46. Specifically, when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is "3", the hold change effect pattern is determined at the determination rate as shown in FIG. 46(A). Also, when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start-up winning command is "4", the hold change effect execution pattern is determined at the determination rate as shown in FIG. 46(B).

The pending change effect execution pattern accompanied by action effects is the pending display number when the pending change effect is executed, the mode of change in the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 at that time, and the mode of change of the pending display image at that time. And the pending change effect execution patterns HP4'-1 to HP4'-2, HP5'-1 to HP5'-2, HP6'-1 to HP6'-2, HP7'-1 to HP7'. -2 is prepared.

For example, the hold change effect execution pattern HP4′-1 is oriented in the direction of the sub-image display device 9051 in the variable display executed when the hold change effect execution pattern is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the hold display number [2]. After executing the action failure effect by rotating from the vertical to diagonally, the display color of the target hold display image remains white without executing the hold change effect, and the hold change effect execution pattern is the hold display number [ 1] In the variable display executed when shifting to the storage area corresponding to [1], the sub image display device 9051 is rotated from the diagonal direction to the horizontal direction to execute the action success effect, and then execute the hold change effect. It is a hold change effect execution pattern that changes the display color of the hold display image of the target from white to green.

For example, the pending change effect execution pattern HP5′-2 is oriented in the direction of the sub-image display device 9051 in the variable display executed when the pending change effect execution pattern is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the pending display number [2]. After rotating the vertical to horizontal to execute the action success effect, execute the hold change effect to change the display color of the target hold display image from white to green, and the hold change effect execution pattern is the hold display number. In the variable display executed when shifting to the storage area corresponding to [1], after executing the action success effect with the sub-image display device 9051 kept in the horizontal direction, the hold change effect is executed again to execute the target change effect. It is a hold change effect execution pattern for changing the display color of the hold display image from green to red.

For example, the pending change effect execution pattern HP7′-1 is oriented in the direction of the sub image display device 9051 in the variable display executed when the pending change effect execution pattern is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the pending display number [3]. After rotating the vertical to horizontal to execute the action success effect, execute the hold change effect to change the display color of the target hold display image from white to green, and the hold change effect execution pattern is the hold display number. In the variable display executed when shifting to the storage area corresponding to [2], after the action failure effect is executed with the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 left unchanged from the vertical direction, the hold change effect is not executed again. In the variable display executed when the display color of the target hold display image remains green and the hold change effect execution pattern is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the hold display number [1], the sub-image display device 9051 Is a hold change effect execution pattern in which the display color of the target hold display image is kept green without executing the hold change effect again after the action failure effect is executed with the orientation left unchanged.

In step S90678, the effect control CPU 90120 first extracts numerical data indicating the random number value SR3′ for determining the pending change effect execution pattern updated by the random number circuit 90124, the effect random counter, or the like. Then, based on the random number value SR3', any one of the first hold change effect execution pattern determination table to the fifth hold change effect execution pattern determination table stored in advance and stored in the ROM 90121 is referred to, and the hold change is performed. Determine the performance execution pattern.

The first hold change effect execution pattern determination table is referred to when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is [2] when it is determined in step S90676 that the effect is not executed. .. In the first hold change effect execution pattern determination table, for example, a hold change that is a determination result in a range in which the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR3′ differs depending on the winning determination result specified by the winning determination result designating command. It may be allocated to the performance execution pattern HP1′-1 or HP1′-2.

The second hold change effect execution pattern determination table is referred to when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is [3] when it is determined in step S90676 that the effect is not executed. .. In the second hold change effect execution pattern determination table, for example, a hold change that is a determination result in a range in which the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR3′ is different depending on the winning result determination result designated by the winning determination result specification command. It may be allocated to the performance execution patterns HP1'-1, HP1'-2, HP2'-1, HP2'-2.

The third hold change effect execution pattern determination table is referred to when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is [4] when it is determined in step S90676 that the effect is not executed. .. In the third hold change effect execution pattern determination table, for example, a hold change that is a determination result in a range in which the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR3′ is different depending on the winning result determination result designated by the winning determination result designation command. It may be allocated to the performance execution patterns HP1'-1, HP1'-2, HP3'-1, HP3'-2.

The fourth hold change effect execution pattern determination table is referred to when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is [3] when it is determined in step S90676 to execute the effect. In the fourth hold change effect execution pattern determination table, for example, a hold change that is a determination result in a range in which the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR3′ differs depending on the winning result determination result designated by the winning determination result designation command. It may be allocated to the performance execution patterns HP4'-1, HP4'-2, HP5'-1, HP5'-2.

The fifth hold change effect execution pattern determination table is referred to when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning award command is [4] when it is determined to execute the effect effect in step S90676. In the fifth hold change effect execution pattern determination table, for example, a hold change that is a determination result in a range in which the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR3′ is different depending on the winning determination result specified by the winning determination result designating command. It may be allocated to the performance execution patterns HP6'-1, HP6'-2, HP7'-1, HP7'-2.

The effect control CPU 90120 sets any of the pending change effect execution patterns assigned to the determined value that matches the random number value SR3′ extracted this time according to the winning determination result in each pending change effect execution pattern determination table. It is determined as the effect execution pattern of the pending change effect.

As can be seen from the determination ratios in FIGS. 45 and 46, when the winning determination result is “big hit”, the display color of the hold display image finally becomes “red” and the hold change effect execution pattern becomes “green”. It is easier to select than the hold change effect execution pattern, and when the winning judgment result is "miss", the display color of the hold display image finally becomes "green" The hold change effect execution pattern becomes "red" It is easier to select than the hold change effect execution pattern. For this reason, when the hold change effect is executed, the jackpot expectation of the target special-drawing game is better when the final display color of the hold display image is "red" than when it is "green". Is high. Therefore, the hold change effect that sets the final display color of the hold display image to “red” announces that the jackpot expectation is the highest, and sets the final display color of the hold display image to “green”. Although the change effect is lower than "red", it predicts that the jackpot expectation is higher than when the hold change effect is not executed.

Further, as can be seen from the determination ratio of FIG. 46(A), when the winning determination result is “big hit”, when the final display color of the hold display image is the same color, the sub image display device 9051 is in the horizontal direction. It becomes easier to select the hold change effect execution pattern corresponding to the variable display of "2 times" than the hold change effect execution pattern corresponding to the "1 time" variable display, and the winning determination result is "miss". When the final display color of the hold display image is the same color, the hold change effect execution pattern corresponding to the variable display in which the sub-image display device 9051 is in the horizontal direction for “1 time” is “2 times”. It is easier to select than the hold change effect execution pattern corresponding to the variable display of “”. Therefore, when the pending change effect accompanied by the effect effect is executed and the final display color of the pending display image is the same color, the sub-image display device 9051 is in a period corresponding to the variable display of "once". The big hit expectation of the target special-drawing game is higher when the game is horizontally oriented for the period corresponding to the variable display of "twice" than when the game is horizontally oriented.

Further, as can be seen from the determination ratio of FIG. 46(B), when the winning determination result is “big hit”, when the final display color of the hold display image is the same color, the sub image display device 9051 is oriented horizontally. It becomes easier to select the hold change effect execution pattern corresponding to the variable display of "3 times" than the hold change effect execution pattern corresponding to the variable display of "2 times", and the winning determination result is "miss". When the final display color of the hold display image is the same, the hold change effect execution pattern corresponding to the variable display in which the sub image display device 9051 is in the horizontal direction for “2 times” is “3 times”. It is easier to select than the hold change effect execution pattern corresponding to the variable display of “”. Therefore, when the pending change effect accompanied by the effect effect is executed and the final display colors of the pending display images are the same color, the sub-image display device 9051 is a period corresponding to the variable display of "twice". The big hit expectation of the target special figure game is higher when the player is in the horizontal direction for the period corresponding to the variable display of "3 times" than in the horizontal direction.

For this reason, the sub-image display device 9051 announces that the big change expectation degree is the highest in the pending change effect accompanied by the action effect in which the sub-image display device 9051 is turned sideways over the period corresponding to the variable display of "three times". Notice that the pending change effect accompanied by the action effect that becomes sideways over the period corresponding to the variable display of "2 times" is lower than in the case of "3 times" but higher in jackpot expectation than in the case of "1 time" However, the hold change effect accompanied by the action effect in which the sub-image display device 9051 is turned sideways over the period corresponding to the variable display of “one time” is lower than the case of “twice”, but the hold change effect accompanied by the action effect is less. Foretell that the jackpot expectation is higher than when it is not executed.

When the hold change effect is not executed (step S90677; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the effect effect is determined to be executed in step S90676 (step S90679), and when it is executed (step S90679; (YES), the action effect execution pattern which is the pattern for executing the action effect is determined (step S90680). In step S90680, for example, the action effect execution pattern is determined at the same determination rate as the determination rate of the pending change effect execution pattern shown in FIG. For example, a pattern that defines only the change in the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 in the hold change effect execution pattern shown in FIG. 46 may be set as the effect effect execution pattern.

After the step S90678 or S90680, the effect control CPU 90120 stores the determined pending change effect execution pattern or action effect execution pattern in association with the newly received start winning command (step S90681). As a result, it is understood that the special drawing game corresponding to the pending change effect execution pattern or the effect effect execution pattern is the target, and the execution timing of the pending change effect or the effect effect is determined by the pending change effect execution pattern or the effect effect execution pattern. I understand.

After the step S90681, when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning award command is [1] (step S90672; YES), the award determination result designation command designates “no determination” as the determination result. If the pending change effect execution pattern or the effect effect execution pattern is stored (step S90674; YES), or if neither the pending change effect nor the effect effect is executed (step S90679; NO). ), the process of updating the display of the hold display image in response to the reception of the new start winning command is executed (step S90682).

In step S90682, for example, by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 90123 or the like, the pending display number corresponding to the winning determination result designation command reception flag that is turned on is associated. The process of starting the display of the hold display image at the display position of the display area 905H is performed. As a result, the hold display image corresponding to the newly received command at the time of winning the winning a prize is newly displayed. The hold display image is displayed as a hold display image corresponding to the newly held special figure game until the newly held special figure game is executed.

At the time of the first start winning, the first hold display image displayed at the display position corresponding to the hold display number [1] of the command buffer at the time of the first start winning is stored at the first start prize In addition to the command, it also corresponds to the hold data corresponding to the hold number [1] in the first special figure hold storage unit, the first special figure game executed by the hold data, and the like. The same applies to the respective first hold display images displayed at the respective display positions corresponding to the hold display numbers [2] to [4] in the first start prize-winning command buffer.

At the time of the second start winning, the second hold display image displayed at the display position corresponding to the hold display number [1] of the command buffer at the time of the second start winning is stored at the second start prize stored corresponding to the hold display number [1]. In addition to the command, it also corresponds to the hold data corresponding to the hold number [1] in the second special figure hold storage unit, the second special figure game executed by the hold data, and the like. The same applies to the respective second hold display images displayed at the respective display positions corresponding to the hold display numbers [2] to [4] of the second start winning award command buffer.

After step S90682, the pending change effect setting process ends, but at this time, it is preferable to reset the state of each winning determination result specification command reception flag.

The variable display start waiting process in step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the fluctuation start designation command from the main board 9011 is received. The determination may be made based on whether or not the fluctuation start designation command reception flag controlled by the command analysis process is in the on state. When the variation start designation command is received, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in synchronization with the start of the special drawing game, so the value of the effect process flag is "1" which corresponds to the variable display start setting process. After updating to, the variable display start waiting process ends. If the variation start designation command has not been received, the variable display start waiting process ends as it is.

The variable display start setting process of step S90171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines the final stop symbol according to the variable pattern of the variable display this time and the variable display result (step S90321). The fluctuation pattern may be specified based on the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 and stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area. The variable display result may be specified based on the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 and stored in the display result designation command storage area.

For example, when the variable display result is “miss” and the variation pattern is the non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case of “non-reach” in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is not the reach mode, the non-reach combination is configured. The final stop symbol combination is determined as the fixed decorative symbol combination. When the variable display result is “miss” and the variation pattern is a reach variation pattern that specifies “reach”, the final stop symbol combination that constitutes the reach combination is determined as the fixed decorative symbol combination. When the variable display result is "big hit", the combination of final stop symbols forming the big hit combination is determined as the combination of the fixed decorative symbols. The combination of each fixed decorative pattern is prepared in advance by using a random number value updated by a random number for production provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 90124 or the RAM 90122, and a determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121. It is recommended to randomly decide from the combination of fixed decorative designs. In addition, the same decorative pattern forming the big hit combination may be different depending on the big hit type.

After step S90321, the effect control CPU 90120 executes effect control pattern setting processing (step S90322). FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control pattern setting process. In the effect control pattern setting processing, the effect control CPU 90120 first shifts the stored contents of the first start prize-winning command buffer or the second start prize-winning command buffer (step S90901). Specifically, when the first variation start designation command is received, the first start winning prize stored corresponding to the first reserved display numbers [2] to [4] in the first start winning prize command buffer. The hour command, the hold change effect execution pattern, or the action effect execution pattern is shifted to the higher-order first hold display numbers [1] to [3]. When the second variation start designation command is received, the second start winning prize command and the pending change stored corresponding to the second holding display numbers [2] to [4] in the second starting prize command buffer. The production execution pattern or the action production execution pattern is shifted to the second reserved display numbers [1] to [3] of higher numbers.

Next, the holding change effect execution pattern stored in the first start winning award command buffer or the second start winning award command buffer of which the stored content is shifted is checked (step S90902), and the pending change effect execution pattern or In the case where the action effect execution pattern is stored, a hold display number designated by the hold change effect execution pattern or the action effect execution pattern, and an actual hold display number corresponding to the hold change effect execution pattern or the action effect execution pattern. Is the same, and it is confirmed whether or not it is necessary to execute the pending change effect or the effect effect (step S90903).

The hold display number specified by the hold change effect execution pattern or action effect execution pattern and the actual hold display number corresponding to the hold change effect execution pattern or action effect execution pattern are the same, and the hold display effect or action effect is executed. When performing (step S90903; YES), an effect control pattern for executing an on-hold change effect that changes the on-hold display image in a manner of changing the on-hold display image at the on-hold display number of this time, which is designated by the on-hold change effect execution pattern. , A hold change that changes the hold display image in the change mode of the hold display image after executing the effect effect in the mode of displacement of the sub-image display device 9051 at the current hold display number specified by the hold change effect execution pattern The effect control pattern for executing the effect, or the effect control pattern for executing the effect in the mode of displacement of the sub-image display device 9051 at the current hold display number, which is set in the effect effect execution pattern, is set (step S90904). For example, when the hold change effect execution pattern is HP3′-2 and the hold display number corresponding to the post-shift hold change effect execution pattern is [3], a hold change effect that changes the hold display image from white to green is displayed. The production control pattern to be executed is set. When the hold change effect execution pattern is HP3′-2 and the hold display number corresponding to the post-shift hold change effect execution pattern is [1], the hold change effect of changing the hold display image from green to red is executed. Set the production control pattern.

In this embodiment, a plurality of hold change effect execution patterns or action effect execution patterns are not stored, but as another embodiment, a plurality of hold change effect execution patterns or action effect execution patterns are stored. When executing the hold change effect and the effect effect for each hold change effect execution pattern and the effect effect execution pattern, the effect control pattern for executing a plurality of hold change effects and the effect effect is set as the current use pattern. To do. At this time, a plurality of pending change effects and action effects may be executed simultaneously or sequentially.

The hold display number specified by the hold change effect execution pattern or action effect execution pattern and the actual hold display number corresponding to the hold change effect execution pattern or action effect execution pattern are different, and the hold display effect or action effect is not executed. In the case (step S90903; NO), or after step S90904, the presence or absence of execution of the callout notice effect and the callout notice effect execution pattern that is the pattern for executing the callout notice effect when executing the callout notice effect are determined ( Step S90905). The call advance notice effect is an effect in which a call screen of a predetermined character appears at the start of variable display of the decorative pattern. In step S90905, for example, the presence or absence of execution of the callout notice effect and the callout notice effect execution pattern when executing the call notice effect are determined at the determined rates as shown in FIG.

The call advance notice effect execution pattern specifies a call mode of a predetermined character when executing the call advance notice effect, and call advance notice effect execution patterns YP1′-1 and YP1′-2 are prepared.

For example, the call-out notice production execution pattern YP1′-1 is a call-out notice production execution pattern in which a call-out notice production is performed and a predetermined character calls out “I do not want to do”.

For example, the call-out notice production execution pattern YP1′-2 is a call-out notice production execution pattern in which a call-out notice production is executed and a predetermined character calls out “Hey”.

In step S90905, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines the presence/absence of execution of the callout notice effect updated by the random number circuit 90124, the effect random counter, or the like, and the callout notice effect execution pattern when executing the call notice effect. Numerical data indicating the random number value SR4′ of is extracted. Next, based on the random number value SR4′, referring to the call announcement production execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121, the presence or absence of the call announcement production is executed, and the call announcement when the call announcement production is executed. Determine the performance execution pattern.

In the call advance notice effect execution determination table, for example, the presence or absence of execution of the call advance notice effect, which is the determination result, in a range in which the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR4′ differs depending on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, It suffices to be assigned to the call announcement effect execution patterns YP1′-1 and YP1′-2 when executing the call announcement effect.

The effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to execute the call advance notice effect assigned to the determined value that matches the random number value SR4′ extracted this time in the call advance notice effect execution determination table according to the winning determination result, and the call advance notice effect. When executing, any one of the callout notice production execution patterns is determined as the effect execution pattern of the callout notice production when executing this call notice production.

As can be seen from the determination ratio in FIG. 49, when the variation pattern is “reach”, the call announcement production is easier to execute than when the variation pattern is “non-reach”. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach", the opposite is true. For this reason, when the call advance notice effect is executed, the reach expectation that the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the predetermined reach mode is higher than that when it is not executed.

Further, as can be seen from the determination ratio in FIG. 49, when the variation pattern is “reach”, the call announcement of the predetermined character is “yes” The call announcement that the performance execution pattern is “do not want to do” It is easier to select than the performance execution pattern, and when the variation pattern is "non-reach", the call of the predetermined character becomes "I do not want to do" Call notice The performance execution pattern is called "Hey" It is easier to select than the notice production execution pattern. Therefore, when the call advance notice effect is executed, the reach expectation is higher when the call of the predetermined character is “hey” than when the call is “do not want to do”. For this reason, the call-out notice production in which the call of a predetermined character is "Hey~" announces that the reach expectation is the highest, and the call-out notice production in which the call of the predetermined character becomes "I don't want to do" is , It is lower than "Hey", but gives a warning that the reach expectation level is higher than when the call announcement production is not executed.

After step S90905, it is determined whether the change pattern of the variable display this time specifies the reach (step S90906).

When the variation pattern of the variable display this time specifies the reach (step S90906; YES), it is determined whether to execute the count-up notice effect (step S90907). The count-up notice effect is an effect in which a predetermined character counts up. The effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to execute the count-up notice effect, for example, at the determination rate shown in FIG.

In step S90907, the effect control CPU 90120 first extracts numerical value data indicating the random number value SR5′ for determining whether or not to execute the count-up notice effect, which is updated by the random number circuit 90124, the effect random counter, or the like. Then, based on the random number value SR5′, the presence or absence of execution of the count-up notice effect is determined by referring to the count-up notice effect execution determination table stored in advance and stored in the ROM 90121. In the count-up notice effect execution determination table, for example, the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR5′ differs depending on whether the current variation pattern specifies execution of super reach or execution of normal reach only. In the range, it may be assigned to “with execution” or “without execution” as the determination result. The effect control CPU 90120, in the count-up notice effect execution determination table, determines whether the current variation pattern specifies execution of super-reach or normal-reach only, for the determination value that matches the random number value SR5′ extracted this time. Depending on whether the assigned value is "execution", it is decided to execute the count-up notice effect, and when the assigned decision result is "no execution", the count-up notice effect is executed. Decide not to.

As can be seen from the determination rate in FIG. 50, when the super reach is executed, the execution rate of the count-up notice production is high, and when only the normal reach is executed, the execution rate of the count-up notice production is low. When the performance is executed, there is a high possibility that it will evolve from normal reach to super reach.

Subsequently, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether to execute the specific effect (step S90908). The specific effect is an effect that maintains the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051, and a different effect can be performed during a period in which the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the portrait orientation and a period in which the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the landscape orientation. Is. The effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to execute the specific effect, for example, at the determination rate shown in FIG. 51.

In step S90908, the effect control CPU 90120 first extracts numerical value data indicating a random number value SR6′ for determining whether or not to execute the specific effect, which is updated by the random number circuit 90124, the effect random counter, or the like. Then, based on the random number value SR6', the presence/absence of execution of the specific effect is determined by referring to the specific effect execution determination table previously stored and prepared in the ROM 90121. In the specific effect execution determination table, for example, a range in which the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR6′ differs depending on whether or not the call announcement effect is executed and the effect execution pattern of the call announcement effect when the call announcement effect is executed Then, it may be allocated to “with execution” or “without execution” as the determination result. The effect control CPU 90120, in the specific effect execution determination table, determines whether or not the call advance notice effect is executed, and the call advance notice effect execution when the call advance notice effect is executed, for the decision value that matches the random number value SR6′ extracted this time. When the determined value assigned according to the pattern is "executed", it is determined to execute the specific effect, and when the assigned determined value is "no execution", it is determined not to execute the specific effect.

As can be seen from the determination rate in FIG. 51, when the call announcement performance is executed, the execution rate of the specific effect is high, and when the call announcement effect is not executed, the execution rate of the specific effect is low, so the call announcement effect is executed. If so, it is highly possible that the specific effect is executed and the sub-image display device 9051 is turned sideways.

Further, as can be seen from the determination rate in FIG. 51, when the call advance notice effect is executed, when the call of the predetermined character is “I do not want to do”, the execution rate of the specific effect is high and “Hey”. , The execution ratio of the specific effect is low, so when the call advance notification effect is executed, when the call of the predetermined character is "I do not want to do", the specific effect is executed and the sub-image display is performed. It is likely that the device 9051 will be sideways.

Subsequently, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the specific effect is determined to be executed in step S90907 (step S90909). When the specific effect is executed (step S90909; YES), the specific effect is executed in a pattern. A specific effect execution pattern is determined (step S90910). In step S90910, for example, the specific effect execution pattern is determined at a determination rate as shown in FIG.

The specific effect execution pattern is for designating a period during which the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the horizontal orientation when the specific effect is executed, and specific effect execution patterns TP1′-1 to TP1′-3 are prepared.

For example, the specific effect execution pattern TP1′-1 is a specific effect execution pattern in which the specific effect is executed and the sub-image display device 9051 is horizontally maintained for “1000 ms”.

For example, the specific effect execution pattern TP1′-2 is a specific effect execution pattern in which the specific effect is executed and the sub-image display device 9051 is horizontally maintained for “10000 ms”.

For example, the specific effect execution pattern TP1′-1 is a specific effect execution pattern in which the specific effect is executed and the sub-image display device 9051 is horizontally maintained at “15000 ms”.

In step S90910, the effect control CPU 90120 first extracts numerical data indicating the random number value SR7′ for determining the specific effect execution pattern, which is updated by the random number circuit 90124, the effect random counter, or the like. Then, based on the random number value SR7', the specific effect execution pattern is determined by referring to the specific effect execution pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121.

In the specific effect execution pattern determination table, for example, the specific effect execution pattern TP1′-1 that is the determination result within a range in which the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR7′ differs depending on the variable display result designated by the display result designation command. ˜TP1′-3 may be assigned.

The effect control CPU 90120, in the specific effect execution pattern determination table, effects one of the specific effect execution patterns assigned to the determined value that matches the random number value SR7′ extracted this time according to the variable display result, for the specific effect this time. Determined as an execution pattern.

As can be seen from the determination ratio of FIG. 52, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the specific effect execution pattern in which the sub image display device 9051 is maintained in the horizontal direction for a long time is the time in which the sub image display device 9051 is maintained in the horizontal direction. Is easier to select than the short special effect execution pattern, and when the variable display result is “miss”, the special effect execution pattern in which the time for maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 in the horizontal direction is short is displayed on the sub-image display device 9051. It is easier to select than the specific effect execution pattern in which the time to maintain the sideways is long. Therefore, when the specific effect is executed, the longer the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the sideways direction, the higher the jackpot expectation is. Therefore, the specific effect of maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 in the horizontal direction for "15000 ms" gives a notice that the jackpot expectation is the highest, and the specific effect of maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 in the horizontal direction for "10000 ms" is "15000 ms". It is lower than maintaining, but the specific effect of holding the sub-image display device 9051 sideways for “1000 ms” is lower than maintaining for “10000 ms”. Foretell that the jackpot expectation is higher than when the specific effect is not executed.

After that, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the specific effect execution pattern TP1′-1 is determined as the effect execution pattern of the current specific effect in step S90910 (step S90911), and it is not the specific effect execution pattern TP1′-1. (Step S90911; NO), a pseudo-relation effect execution pattern that is a pattern for executing the variable display effect of "pseudo-relation" is determined (Step S90912).

In the variable display effect of "pseudo-run", a fixed decorative pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in response to the start condition of the special figure game being satisfied once. It is possible to perform the effect display which is temporarily stopped by the time and then changed again up to a predetermined number of times. The number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations is the "Left", "Middle", "Right" decorative pattern display, excluding the initial fluctuation from the start of variable display of decorative patterns until the first temporary stop of all decorative patterns. It may be the number of times that the decorative pattern changes again in all of the areas 905L, 905C, and 905R.

In the variable display effect of “pseudo-run”, as an example, a plurality of predetermined predetermined pseudo-opportunities of special combinations are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The decorative pattern that is one of the types of lost combinations is temporarily displayed. In the variable display effect of “pseudo-link”, a predetermined effect such as an image display that is a re-variation effect may be executed along with a plurality of times of variable display including the initial change. It should be noted that the re-variation effect is not limited to that by displaying an image on the screen of the image display device 905 or the sub-image display device 9051, and may include any effect operation using various effect devices. Good.

As an example of re-variation effect different from the image display, during each variable display period by the variable display effect of "pseudo-relation", it is turned on among a plurality of decoration LEDs provided inside or outside the game area. The items may be controlled to increase one by one. Further, during each variable display period, the display color of the decorative LED may be controlled to change, or the illuminated one of the plurality of decorative LEDs may be controlled to change. ..

As a further example of the re-variation effect different from the image display, during the period of the variable display by the variable display effect of "pseudo-relation", the effect model provided inside or outside the game area is controlled to operate. May be. At this time, the operation mode of the effect model may be controlled to change during each variable display period, or the operating model of the effect models may be controlled to change. ..

It is possible to control to display a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image on the screen of the image display device 905 during each variable display period of the variable display effect of “pseudo-link”. Further, as the re-variation effect, for example, when a decorative pattern that is a pseudo continuous chance is temporarily stopped and displayed, a sound that is a special sound effect may be controlled to be output from the speakers 908L and 908R. In addition to part or all of these re-variation effects, or instead of part or all of these re-variation effects, lighting or blinking of the decorative LED, operation of the effect model, display of effect images, sound effects May be controlled so as to execute a re-variation effect in which a part or all of the outputs are combined. At this time, rather than a case where the re-variation effect is executed with only one type of effect mode, a case in which a re-fluctuation effect in which a plurality of types of effect modes are combined is executed or a re-fluctuation effect is performed multiple times In the case where the effect mode in (1) changes, the possibility of a predetermined game value such as the jackpot expectation degree or the possibility of being controlled to a game state advantageous to the player may be increased.

In this embodiment, in the variable display effect of "pseudo-repeated", the pseudo-repeated fluctuation is performed once to three times, so that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once. The variable display of can be displayed as if it was started two to four times in a row. Then, when the number of pseudo-repetitions is large, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the number of pseudo-repetitions is small. In addition, the generation rate of the effect may be controlled so as to change depending on the number of times of pseudo repetitions. For example, the pseudo-repeating fluctuation may be performed twice to be the “reach confirmation”, and the pseudo-repeating fluctuation may be performed three times to be the “super reach confirmation”. The number of times of pseudo-repetition in the variable display effect of "pseudo-repetition" may be set to be greater than 1 to 3 times, such as 4 times or 5 times.

In step S90912, for example, the pseudo continuous effect execution pattern is determined at a determination rate as shown in FIG.

The pseudo-relation effect execution pattern specifies the number of pseudo-repetitions when the "pseudo-relation" variable display effect is executed and the predetermined character line when ending the "pseudo-relation" variable display effect. , Simulated connection effect execution patterns GP1′-1 to GP1′-3 are prepared.

For example, the pseudo-relational effect execution pattern GP1′-1 executes the variable display effect of “pseudo-relation” with the pseudo-repetition number of one time and finishes the variable display effect of “pseudo-relation” of a predetermined character. This is a pseudo-relational production execution pattern in which the dialogue becomes "Peace!".

For example, the pseudo continuous effect execution pattern GP1'-2 is for a predetermined character when the variable display effect of "pseudo continuous" is executed by executing the variable display effect of "pseudo continuous" in which the number of times of pseudo continuous is two. This is a pseudo-relational production execution pattern in which the dialogue becomes “chance!”.

For example, the pseudo continuous effect execution pattern GP1′-3 executes the variable display effect of “pseudo continuous” in which the number of times of pseudo continuous is 3 and ends the variable display effect of “pseudo continuous” of the predetermined character. It is a pseudo continuous production execution pattern in which the dialogue becomes "Amazing!".

In step S90912, the effect control CPU 90120 first extracts numerical value data indicating the random number value SR8′ for determining the pseudo continuous effect execution pattern, which is updated by the random number circuit 90124, the effect random counter, or the like. Then, based on the random number value SR8', the pseudo continuous effect execution pattern is determined by referring to the pseudo continuous effect execution pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121.

In the pseudo continuous effect execution pattern determination table, for example, the numerical value to be compared with the random value SR8′ differs depending on which of the specific effect execution pattern TP1′-2 and the specific effect execution pattern TP1′-3 is determined. As long as it is within the range, it may be assigned to the pseudo continuous effect execution patterns GP1′-1 to GP1′-3 that are the determination result.

The effect control CPU 90120 determines which of the pseudo continuous effect execution patterns is assigned to the determined value that matches the random value SR8′ extracted this time in the pseudo continuous effect execution pattern determination table according to the specific effect execution pattern. It is determined as the effect execution pattern of the variable display effect of “pseudo-run”.

As can be seen from the determination ratio in FIG. 53, in the case of the specific effect execution pattern “TP1′-3” having the highest jackpot expectation degree, it is easy to select the pseudo continuous effect execution pattern having the large number of pseudo continuous occurrences, and the specific effect execution is performed. In the case of the specific effect execution pattern "TP1'-2", which has a lower jackpot expectation degree than the pattern "TP1'-3", it is easy to select a pseudo effect effect execution pattern having a small number of times of pseudo effect. Therefore, when the variable display effect of "pseudo-repeating" is executed, the larger the number of pseudo-repeating times, the higher the jackpot expectation. For this reason, "three times" of re-variation effect is executed, and the variable display effect of "pseudo-run" in which the dialogue of the predetermined character at the end of the effect is "Amazing!" has the highest jackpot expectation. Then, "2 times" re-variation effect is executed, and "3 times" re-variation effect is executed for the variable display effect of "pseudo-run" in which the dialogue of the predetermined character at the end of the effect is "chance!" Although it is lower than when the re-variation effect is "one time", it is announced that the jackpot expectation degree is higher than when the re-variation effect is "one time". The variable display effect of "pseudo rendition" in which the character's dialogue is "Peace!" is lower than when the re-variation effect of "2 times" is executed, but it is lower than when the variable display effect of "pseudo rendition" is not executed. Also foretells that the jackpot expectations are high.

After that, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute the count-up notice effect in step S90907 (step S90913), and in the case of execution (step S90913; YES), the specific effect is executed and the sub-image is executed. A count-up notice effect execution pattern that is a pattern for executing the count-up notice effect when the display device 9051 is maintained in the horizontal direction is determined (step S90914). In step S90914, for example, the count-up notice effect execution pattern is determined at a determination rate as shown in FIG.

The count-up notice effect execution pattern specifies the number of counts by a predetermined character when the count-up notice effect execution is performed, and count notice advancement effect execution patterns YP2'-1 to YP2'-3 are prepared.

For example, the count announcement effect execution pattern YP2'-1 is a count announcement effect execution pattern in which the count announcement effect is executed and the predetermined character counts up to "3".

For example, the count announcement production execution pattern YP2′-2 is a count announcement production execution pattern in which the count announcement production is executed and the predetermined character counts up to “4”.

For example, the count announcement effect execution pattern YP2′-3 is a count announcement effect execution pattern in which the count announcement effect is executed and the predetermined character counts up to “5”.

In step S90914, the effect control CPU 90120 first extracts numerical data indicating the random number value SR9′ for determining the count-up notice effect execution pattern updated by the random number circuit 90124, the effect random counter, or the like. Then, based on the random number value SR9', the count-up notice production execution pattern determination table prepared in advance by being stored in the ROM 90121 is determined to determine the count-up notice production execution pattern.

In the count-up notice production execution pattern determination table, for example, the count-up notice production execution pattern that is the determination result within a range in which the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR9′ differs depending on the variable display result designated by the display result designation command. It may be allocated to YP2'-1 to YP2'-3.

The effect control CPU 90120 determines, in the count-up notice effect execution pattern determination table, one of the count-up notice effect execution patterns assigned according to the variable display result to the determined value that matches the random number value SR9′ extracted this time. It is determined as the production execution pattern of the count-up notice production.

As can be seen from the determination ratio of FIG. 54(A), when the variable display result is “big hit”, it is easy to select the count-up notice production execution pattern in which the number of counts by the predetermined character is large, and the variable display result is “ In the case of “miss”, it is easy to select a count-up notice effect execution pattern in which the number of counts by a predetermined character is small. For this reason, when the count-up notice production is executed, the larger the number of counts by the predetermined character, the higher the jackpot expectation. For this reason, the count-up notice production that counts up to "5" by the predetermined character announces that the jackpot expectation is the highest, and the count-up notice production that counts up to "4" by the predetermined character is: Although it is lower than the count "5", it predicts that the jackpot expectation is higher than the count "3", and the count-up notice production that counts up to the count "3" by a predetermined character is lower than the count "4". It announces that the jackpot expectation is higher than when the count-up notice production is not executed.

After step S90914, if the effect execution pattern of the specific effect this time is the specific effect execution pattern "TP1'-1" (step S90911; YES), or if the count-up notice effect is not executed (step S90913; NO). ), performing the variable display effect according to the combination of the variation pattern and the determined final stop symbol, and as a part of the variable display effect, the specific effect and the specific effect are executed, and the sub-image display device 9051 An effect control pattern capable of executing a notification effect of notifying that the player has turned sideways is set as the current usage pattern (step S90915).

When the specific effect is not executed (step S90909; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute the count-up notice effect in step S90907 (step S90916), and if it is executed (step S90916; YES), a count-up notice effect execution pattern that is a pattern for executing the count-up notice effect when the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the portrait orientation without executing the specific effect is determined (step S90917). In step S90917, for example, the same process as the process in step S90914 is performed, and the count-up notice effect execution pattern is determined at the determination rate as shown in FIG. 54(B).

As can be seen from the determined ratios of FIGS. 54A and 54B, when the count-up notice effect is executed when the specific effect is executed and the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the horizontal direction, the specific effect is executed. When the variable display result is “big hit”, the number of counts by the predetermined character is larger than that when the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the portrait orientation without being executed. It is easy to select the up-announcement notice execution pattern, and when the variable display result is “miss”, it is easy to select the count-up notice production execution pattern in which the number of counts by the predetermined character is small. Therefore, even if the count-up advance notice effect in which the number of counts by the predetermined character is the same, the big hit expectation of the count-up advance notice effect executed when the specific effect is performed and the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the horizontal direction. The degree is higher than the jackpot expectation degree of the count-up notice effect executed when the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the portrait orientation without executing the specific effect.

After step S90917 or when the count-up notice effect is not executed (step S90916; NO), it is determined whether the variation pattern of the variable display this time specifies super reach (step S90918).

When the variation pattern of the variable display this time specifies super reach (step S90918; YES), whether or not the development effect is executed, and the development effect that is the pattern for executing the development effect when executing the development effect The execution pattern is determined (step S90919). The development time effect is an effect executed when the normal reach is changed to the super reach. In step S90919, for example, the presence/absence of execution of the development effect and the development effect execution pattern in the case of executing the development effect are determined at the determined ratios as shown in FIG. 55.

The development effect execution pattern specifies the aspect of the effect when the development effect is executed, and development effect execution patterns HP1′-1 and HP1′-2 are prepared.

For example, the development performance execution pattern HP1′-1 is a development performance execution pattern in which the “first character” acts on the decorative pattern.

For example, the development performance execution pattern HP1′-1 is a development performance execution pattern in which the “second character” acts on the decorative pattern.

In step S90919, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not to execute the development effect updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter, and the development effect execution pattern when the development effect is executed. Numerical data indicating the random number SR10' for use is extracted. Subsequently, based on the random number value SR10′, the development performance execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 is referred to, whether or not the development performance is executed, and the development time when the development performance is executed. Determine the performance execution pattern.

In the development effect execution determination table, for example, in the range in which the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR10′ differs according to the variable display result designated by the display result designation command, the presence or absence of the execution effect as the determination result is determined. It may be assigned to the development effect execution patterns HP1′-1 and HP1′-2 when the development effect is executed.

The effect control CPU 90120, in the development effect execution determination table, determines whether or not to execute the development effect assigned to the determined value that matches the random number value SR10′ extracted this time according to the variable display result, and executes the development effect. In the case of doing, any of the development effect execution patterns is determined as the effect execution pattern of the development effect when executing the development effect this time.

As can be seen from the determination ratio in FIG. 55, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the development effect is easier to be executed than when the variable display result is “miss”. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “miss”, the opposite is true. Therefore, when the development effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when it is not executed.

As can be seen from the determination ratio in FIG. 55, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the development effect execution pattern in which the “second character” acts on the decorative pattern and the “first character” acts on the decorative pattern It is easier to select than the development effect execution pattern, and when the variable display result is “miss”, the development effect execution pattern in which the “first character” acts on the decorative pattern is decorated by the “second character”. It is easier to select than the development effect execution pattern that acts on the design. Therefore, when the development effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher when the “second character” acts on the decorative design than when the “first character” acts on the decorative design. For this reason, the development time effect in which the "second character" acts on the decorative pattern announces that the jackpot expectation is the highest, and the development time effect in which the "first character" acts on the decorative pattern is the "first character". Although it is lower than ", it predicts that the jackpot expectation is higher than when the development effect is not executed.

After step S90919, if the variation pattern of the current variable display does not specify the reach (step S90906; NO), or if the variation pattern of the variable display of this time does not specify the super reach (step S90908; NO), the variation pattern or The variable display effect according to the determined final stop symbol combination is executed, and the effect control pattern not executing the specific effect or the like is set as the current use pattern (step S90920).

After steps S90915 and S90920, the effect control pattern setting process ends.

Returning to FIG. 47, after step S90322, the effect control CPU 90120 initializes the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122 with a timer value corresponding to the special figure change time corresponding to the current change pattern, for example. It is set as a value (step S90323).

Then, the setting for starting the variation of the decorative pattern and the like in the image display device 905 and the variation of the small pattern in the sub image display device 9051 is performed. At this time, for example, by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 90123 based on the display control data included in the effect control pattern set as the use pattern in step S90322, the image is displayed. "Left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, 905R provided in the display area of the display device 905 start changing the decorative pattern, and the display area of the sub-image display device 9051. It is sufficient to start the fluctuation of the small symbols in the small symbol display area 9051V provided in.

After that, the display update of the hold display image is set (step S90325). For example, if the fluctuation start designation command being received is the first fluctuation start designation command, a predetermined display control command is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 90123, and the like, and the area to the left of the display area 905H is displayed. The leftmost first reserved display image of 905 HA is erased, and each of the other first reserved display images is shifted to the display position on the left side. For example, if the fluctuation start designation command being received is the second fluctuation start designation command, a predetermined display control command is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 90123, and the like, to the right of the display area 905H. The leftmost second reserved display image of 905HB is erased, and each of the other second reserved display images is shifted to the display position on the left side.

As described above, the start prize command is newly stored in the start prize command buffer in response to the holding data being newly stored in the special drawing holding storage section when the special drawing game is held. .. Then, at this time, the hold display symbol is added in step S90682. At the start of the special figure game, one stored data is deleted from the special figure reservation storage unit, and the stored content of the command at the time of starting winning is shifted in step S90901. Then, at this time, in step S90325, one hold display symbol is deleted, and the display positions of the other hold display symbols are shifted. In this way, the hold display number and the hold number correspond to each other, and when the numbers are the same, the start winning command, the hold data, and the special drawing game corresponding to the hold data correspond to each other, and further, the same number. The hold display design of the display position corresponding to the hold display number of will also correspond.

After that, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to "2" which is a value corresponding to the variable display processing (step S90326), and the variable display start setting processing is ended.

The variable display effect process in step S90172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect process, various control data are read from the effect control pattern determined in step S90171 corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90122, and the decorative pattern is changed. Processing for performing various effect controls during display is included. Further, in the variable display during presentation processing, in response to receiving the symbol fixing command transmitted from the main board 9011, etc., the fixed decorative symbol as the final stop symbol which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed. It includes a process that causes it. In addition, in response to the end code being read from the predetermined effect control pattern, the fixed decorative pattern may be completely stopped and displayed. In this case, when the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed, the production control board 9012 can autonomously operate even if the production control command from the main board 9011 is not used. The variable display result can be confirmed by deriving and displaying the fixed decorative pattern. After performing such effect control, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".

The special figure winning waiting process of step S90173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the special figure winning wait process, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command has been received. Then, when it is determined that the hit start designation command is received, the effect control pattern for executing the big hit medium effect that is executed in the big hit game state is set to the use pattern, and the value of the effect process flag is "4." Update to ". At this time, a timer initial value corresponding to the execution time of the effect control pattern set as the usage pattern is set in the effect control process timer, and this processing is ended.

When it is determined that the hit start designation command has not been received, it is determined whether the hit start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed. For example, the passage of the waiting time is determined by subtracting 1 from the effect control process timer value and determining whether the timer value obtained by subtracting 1 is "0". If the timer value after subtraction of 1 is not "0", it means that the hit start designation command reception waiting time has not elapsed, so this processing is ended as it is. If the timer value after subtracting 1 is "0", it means that the hit start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed, so it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is "miss", The value of the production process flag is updated to "0", and this processing ends.

The hitting process of step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". In this hitting process, the effect control CPU 90120 decrements the timer value of the effect control process timer by 1 and has the same value as the timer value after decrementing 1 of the data included in the effect control pattern selected as the usage pattern. The effect operation control is performed based on the effect control execution data associated with the process timer determination value. By repeatedly executing step S90174 for each timer interrupt, execution of effects corresponding to the big hit gaming state is realized.

In the hitting process, it is further determined whether or not a hit end designation command has been received. If no hit end designation command has been received, each round game has not finished, so the value of the effect process flag is not updated. The process during hitting ends. Further, when the hit end designation command is received, it means that all the round games have ended, and therefore the value of the effect control process flag is the value corresponding to step S90175 to start the execution of the ending effect. It is updated to 5" and the hitting process is terminated. At the time of this update, the effect control pattern for specifying the ending is selected as the use pattern, and a timer initial value corresponding to the execution time of the effect control pattern selected as the use pattern is set in the effect control process timer. The ending effect control pattern may be set in advance.

The ending process in step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending process, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the ending period has elapsed. For example, the timer value of the production control process timer is decremented by 1, and it is determined whether the data included in the production control pattern associated with the process timer determination value that is the same as the timer value obtained by subtracting 1 is the end code. By doing so, it is determined whether the ending period has elapsed.

When the data included in the effect control pattern is not the end code and the ending period has not elapsed, the same value as the timer value after subtracting 1 from the data included in the effect control pattern selected as the use pattern Based on the effect control execution data associated with the process timer determination value, the ending effect operation control is performed, and the present process ends. By executing step S90175 repeatedly for each timer interrupt, execution of the ending effect is realized. When the data included in the effect control pattern is the end code, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”. When the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, this processing is ended. When the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, various data such as the effect control process timer, the state of various flags and the value of the counter are appropriately reset.

Next, an example of an effect screen realized in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 62. 56 to 62, the arrows displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R and the small symbol display area 9051V indicate that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed.

First, with reference to FIG. 56, description will be made on an example of an effect screen of a call-out notice effect, a specific effect, a notification effect, and a variable display effect of “pseudo-run”.

For example, if it is determined in step S90905 in FIG. 48 that the call-out notice effect execution pattern YP1′-1 has been set, the character image CA (character CA) is displayed on the image display device 905 after the variable display of the decorative pattern starts. A call-out notice effect for calling "I don't want" is started (FIG. 56(A)).

Then, for example, if the variation pattern of the variable display this time specifies the reach, the reach occurs in the variable display of the decorative pattern (FIG. 56(B)).

Thereafter, for example, if it is determined in step S90908 of FIG. 48 that the specific effect is to be executed, the character image CB (character CB) and the cliff image G (cliff G) are displayed on the sub-image display device 9051, and the image is displayed. The specific effect in which the character image CC (three characters CC) is displayed on the display device 905 is started (FIG. 56(C)).

After that, the sub image display device 9051 rotates from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction (FIG. 56D). At this time, in the sub image display device 9051, an effect in which the character CB jumps down below the cliff G is executed in accordance with the operation of the sub image display device 9051 rotating from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction.

Then, when the sub-image display device 9051 is turned sideways, the fact that the sub-image display device 9051 is turned sideways is notified by turning on the game effect lamp 909 provided in the sub-image display device 9051. The notification effect is executed (FIG. 56(E)). In addition, an effect in which the character CB and the three characters CC fight each other is executed in response to the sub image display device 9051 being turned sideways.

Then, for example, if the pseudo continuous effect execution pattern GP1′-1 is determined in step S90912 of FIG. 48, the variable display of the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (FIG. 56(F)). At this time, an effect in which the character CB defeats one of the three characters CC is executed.

After that, the first (last) pseudo continuous variation is started, and, for example, if the specific effect execution pattern TP1′-2 is determined in step S90910 of FIG. 48, after the sub-image display device 9051 is horizontally maintained. In response to the passage of "10000 ms", the sub-image display device 9051 rotates from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction (FIG. 56(G)). At this time, in the sub-image display device 9051, an effect in which the character CB jumps over the cliff G is executed in accordance with the operation of the sub-image display device 9051 rotating from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction. In addition, in the image display device 905, an effect is performed in which one character CC that has been defeated by the character CB is in a collapsed state, and the remaining two characters CC escape.

Thereafter, the sub-image display device 9051 is turned vertically, and in response to the end of the variable display effect of "pseudo-relation", the effect that the character CB emits the line "Peace!" is executed (Fig. 56(H )).

It should be noted that the effect that the character CB defeats the character CC one by one may be executed each time the pseudo continuous variation is repeated. In that case, for example, if three character CCs are displayed, there is a possibility that a maximum of three pseudo-repeating fluctuations will be executed. It is also possible to suggest the number of times of pseudo-variation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, an example of an effect screen for specific effects and notification effects will be described.

For example, if it is determined in step S90908 in FIG. 48 to execute the specific effect, the character image CB (character CB) and the cliff image G (cliff G) are displayed on the sub-image display device 9051, and the image display device 905 is displayed. The specific effect in which the character image CC (three character CCs) is displayed is started (FIG. 57(A)).

After that, the sub-image display device 9051 rotates from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction (FIG. 57(B)). At this time, in the sub image display device 9051, an effect in which the character CB jumps down below the cliff G is executed in accordance with the operation of the sub image display device 9051 rotating from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction.

Then, when the sub-image display device 9051 is turned sideways, the fact that the sub-image display device 9051 is turned sideways is notified by turning on the game effect lamp 909 provided in the sub-image display device 9051. The notification effect is executed (FIG. 57(C)). In addition, an effect in which the character CB and the three characters CC fight each other is executed in response to the sub image display device 9051 being turned sideways.

Then, for example, if the specific effect execution pattern TP1′-1 is determined in step S90910 of FIG. 48, the sub-image is displayed in response to the lapse of “1000 ms” after the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the horizontal orientation. The display device 9051 rotates from horizontal to vertical (FIG. 57D). At this time, in the sub-image display device 9051, an effect in which the character CB jumps over the cliff G is executed in accordance with the operation of the sub-image display device 9051 rotating from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction.

Then, in response to the vertical orientation of the sub-image display device 9051, the effect in which the character CB emits the line "Muri~" is executed (FIG. 57(E)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, an example of an effect screen for effect during development will be described.

For example, if the development effect pattern HP1′-2 is determined in step S90919 of FIG. 48, after the decorative pattern that is the reach-miss combination is temporarily stopped (FIG. 58A), the second sub-image display device 9051 displays the second pattern. The development effect in which the character image (second character CD) is displayed is started (FIG. 58(B)).

After that, in response to the sub image display device 9051 rotating from the vertical direction to the diagonal direction, the effect of moving the second character CD from the sub image display device 9051 to the image display device 905 is executed (FIG. 58(C). )).

After that, the second character CD acts on the temporarily-decorated decorative pattern in the "left" decorative pattern display area 905L, and an effect of changing to another decorative pattern is executed (FIG. 58(D)).

After that, the second character CD acts on the temporarily-decorated decorative pattern in the "right" decorative pattern display area 905R, and an effect of changing to another decorative pattern forming a reach combination is executed (Fig. 58 (E )).

After that, the second character CD acts on the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped in the "medium" decorative pattern display area 905C, and the effect of restarting the variation of the decorative pattern in the "medium" decorative pattern display area 905C is executed. (FIG. 58(F)).

In this way, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, and in response to the sub-image display device 9051 pivoting from the diagonal direction to the vertical direction, the development effect ends (FIG. 58(G)), It develops from normal reach to super reach (Fig. 58(H)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, an example of effect screens for the pending change effect and the effect effect will be described.

When the hold display number corresponding to the newly received command for start winning a prize is "4", for example, if the hold change effect execution pattern HP6'-2 is determined in step S90678 of FIG. 42, the left in the area 905HA. With the hold display image T displayed at the fourth display position from the target, the hold change effect is started (FIG. 59(A)). At this time, the character image CE (character CE) is displayed on the sub-image display device 9051.

After that, at the start of the next variable display, when one hold display symbol is erased and the display positions of the other hold display symbols are shifted, the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated from the vertical direction to the diagonal direction, and the character CE is displayed. The action effect of shooting the arrow Y at the target reserved display image T is executed (FIG. 59(B)).

After that, since the arrow Y does not hit the target hold display image T and the target hold display image T does not change, this action effect is an action failure effect (FIG. 59(C)).

Then, at the start of the next variable display, when one hold display symbol is erased and the display positions of the other hold display symbols are shifted, depending on that the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated from the diagonal direction to the horizontal direction. , The notification effect for notifying that the sub-image display device 9051 is turned sideways by turning on the game effect lamp 909 provided in the sub-image display device 9051 is executed (FIG. 59(D)), and the action effect again. However, this action effect also fails and the hold display image T of the target does not change (FIG. 59(E)).

After that, when the next variable display is started, one hold display symbol is erased, and when the display positions of other hold display symbols are shifted, the action effect is executed again (FIG. 59(F)), and the arrow Y is the target. Since the target hold display image T is hit and the target hold display image T changes from white to red, this action effect is a successful action effect (FIG. 59(G)).

After that, the sub-image display device 9051 rotates from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction, and the hold change effect is finished (FIG. 59(H)).

Here, the game area includes a plurality of areas in which the area where the game ball is hit can be changed by the selection of the player. The left side area is called the left game area and the right side area is called the right game area, with the left and right center of the game area as the boundary, and the game ball that is driven is either the left game area or the right game area. It is designed to enter.

Hitting the game ball aiming at the left game area so that the game ball flows to the left game area is called "left hitting", and hitting the game ball aiming at the right game area so that the game ball flows to the right game area. Is called "right-handed". That is, the game ball hit by the player hitting left and right hits the game area. Then, the left-handed game ball flows down the left game area. On the other hand, the game ball hit to the right flows down in the right game area. In this way, the player changes the firing strength of the hitting ball launching device in accordance with the operation amount of the hitting ball operation handle, thereby changing the area for hitting the game ball by the player's selection, such as hitting right or left. be able to. In addition, the inflow paths of the game balls flowing down the left game area and the right game area are assumed to be innumerable.

For example, if the special variable winning ball device 907 is provided in the right game area, in the big hit game state, it should be hit to the right. Therefore, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the right-handing instruction image S for instructing the right-handing is displayed above the display area of the sub-image display device 9051 (FIG. 60(A)). ..

Then, at the start of the round game in the big hit game state, the right-handing instruction image S is displayed, and the speakers 908L and 908R execute the notification by the voice prompting the right-handing (FIG. 60(B)).

Here, the right-handing instruction image S is one in which two arc-shaped arrow images are displayed around the character image “right-handed”. The arrow image points in the clockwise direction and rotates around the character image in the clockwise direction. As a result, even if the sub-image display device 9051 rotates clockwise as shown in FIG. 60(C), the sub-image display device 9051 rotates counter-clockwise as shown in FIG. 60(D). Even so, the player can specify that the right-handed stroke should be made by the fact that the arc-shaped arrow image pointing in the clockwise direction rotates clockwise.

As shown in FIG. 60A, the right-handing instruction image S displayed above the display area when the sub-image display device 9051 is in the portrait orientation is the sub-image display device 9051 rotated 90 degrees clockwise. Then, when it is turned sideways, it is displayed on the right side of the display area as shown in FIG. In this way, even if the right-handing instruction image S for instructing right-handing is displayed on the right side of the display area of the sub-image display device 9051 that is in the horizontal orientation, it does not cause misunderstanding by the player.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 60(A), when the sub image display device 9051 is in the portrait orientation, the right hitting instruction image S displayed above the display area is 90 degrees counterclockwise by the sub image display device 9051. When rotated and turned sideways, it is displayed on the left side of the display area, as indicated by the broken line in FIG. In this way, when the right-handing instruction image S for instructing right-handing is displayed on the left side of the display area of the sub-image display device 9051 which is in the horizontal direction, although it is an instruction for right-handing, This can lead to the misunderstanding that left-handedness is instructed.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the sub-image display device 9051 is displaying the right-hand hitting instruction image S above the display area when the sub-image display device 9051 is oriented vertically, the sub-image display device 9051 rotates counterclockwise by 90 degrees. 60D, the horizontal position of the sub-image display device is the same as that when the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise as shown by the solid line in FIG. By moving the right hitting instruction image S to the right side of the display area of 9051, it is possible to avoid misunderstanding by the player.

As shown in FIG. 61, it is also possible to perform the effect of rotating the sub-image display device 9051 from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction and then rotating it vertically to a plurality of times during one variable display. In the example shown in FIG. 61, when the jackpot gaming state ends and the time saving state is controlled, by rotating the sub image display device 9051 from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction, the time saving control is being performed. It is informed (FIG. 61(A)). Then, when the specific effect is executed during the time saving control, after rotating the sub-image display device 9051 from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction (FIGS. 61(B) to 61(C)), the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction. The specific effect is executed by moving (FIG. 61(C) to FIG. 61(E)). Then, in response to the end of the specific effect, the sub image display device 9051 is rotated from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction (FIGS. 61E to 61F). After that, the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction to notify again that the time saving control is being performed (FIGS. 61F to 61H).

As shown in FIG. 62, an error notification image E for notifying the occurrence of the error may be displayed on the sub image display device 9051 in response to the occurrence of the error. In that case, the display position of the error notification image E is a position where the entire error notification image E can be visually recognized without shifting the display position of the error notification image E when the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 is changed, or Even if a part of the error notification image E runs outside the display area of the sub-image display device 9051 and becomes invisible or difficult to view, the content of the error notification image E is identifiable.

The present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 901 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-mentioned embodiment, and a part described in the above-mentioned embodiment so that at least one problem in the conventional technique can be solved. It may be provided with the structure of.

(Modification 1) In the above-described embodiment, the sub-image display device 9051 is capable of rotating vertically, horizontally, and diagonally. However, the display device is not limited to the above embodiment as long as it can be displaced in a plurality of states. For example, the sub-image display device 9051 may be movable to the first position and the second position above, below, to the right, and to the left of the first position. The sub image display device 9051 is composed of two first sub image display devices 9051A and second sub image display device 9051B, and the first sub image display device 9051A and the second sub image display device 9051B are combined. It may be displaceable between the first state and the second state in which the first sub-image display device 9051A and the second sub-image display device 9051B are separated. Further, the image display device 905 may be displaceable in a plurality of states, or the image display device 905 and the sub image display device 9051 may be displaceable in a plurality of states. With such a configuration, it can be applied to various display devices.

(Modification 2) In the above-described embodiment, the sub-image display device 9051 executes an effect that the character CB jumps down below the cliff G in accordance with the operation of the sub-image display device 9051 rotating from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction. The one in which the character CB executes the effect of jumping up on the cliff G in accordance with the motion of turning from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction has been described. However, the display device may display a predetermined image in association with the operation of displacing from the first state to the second state, and may display a specific image in association with the operation of displacing from the second state to the first state. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, the aura of a predetermined character image is increased in association with the movement of the display device from the first state to the second state, and the predetermined aura is associated with the movement of the display device from the second state to the first state. The background image moves in the first direction and the display device displaces from the second state to the first state in association with the aura of the character image becoming smaller and the display device displacing from the first state to the second state. The background image may move in a second direction opposite to the first direction in association with the operation. Thus, the predetermined image displayed in association with the movement of the display device from the first state to the second state and the predetermined image displayed in association with the movement of the display device from the second state to the first state The specific image may be any image that is related to each other. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the effect accompanying the displacement of the display device.

(Modification 3) In the above embodiment, the variable display effect of "pseudo-relation" is associated with the operation of the sub-image display device 9051 in the specific effect rotating from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction and then further rotating in the vertical direction. When the sub-image display device 9051 is executed vertically at the start of the specific effect, that is, when the variable display effect of “pseudo-relation” is started, there is no serif of a predetermined character, and at the end of the specific effect, the sub-image display device 9051. Has been described as being executed in a portrait orientation, that is, when the variable display effect of “pseudo-relation” is completed, the effect accompanied by the dialogue of the predetermined character is executed. However, in relation to the operation in which the display device is further displaced to the first state after being displaced from the first state to the second state, the first state before the displacement to the second state and the displacement after the displacement to the second state are performed. It suffices that the effect state is different from that in the first state, and is not limited to that in the above-described embodiment. For example, different effects may be displayed in the first state before the displacement to the second state and the first state after the displacement to the second state, or before the displacement to the second state. Different sound effects may be output in the first state and the first state after the displacement to the second state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the effect associated with the displacement of the display device.

(Modification 4) In the above-described embodiment, the pseudo continuous effect execution pattern is determined according to the period in which the orientation of the sub image display device 9051 is maintained in the horizontal direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the presence or absence of execution of the variable display effect of "pseudo continuous" and the number of times of pseudo continuous variation are defined for each variation pattern, and the variable display of "pseudo continuous" is performed according to the variation pattern determined on the main board 9011 side. When it is specified, the period in which the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the horizontal orientation may be determined according to the number of pseudo-continuous variations or the variable display time. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the setting associated with the execution of the specific effect on the effect control board 9012 side.

(Modification 5) In the above-described embodiment, the effect of maintaining the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 is described as the specific effect, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, as the specific effect, one that maintains the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 909, one that maintains the voice output mode of the speakers 908L and 908R, and one that maintains the display mode of the predetermined image displayed on the image display device 905. And so on. With such a configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to various specific effects in which the aspect of the effect is maintained.

(Modification 6) In the above-described embodiment, in the action effect, the effect in which the predetermined image hits the hold display image is the success action effect, and the effect in which the predetermined image does not hit the hold display image is the action failure effect. However, "the predetermined image acts on the hold display image" is not limited to the case where the predetermined image hits the hold display image. For example, in both the action success effect and the action failure effect, the arrow shot by the predetermined character displayed on the sub-image display device 9051 hits the hold display image, but the action failure effect hits the arrow. It is also possible that an effect of bouncing or breaking is executed, and such an effect is not executed in the action success effect. In this way, in the action effect, it suffices that the effect modes of the action effect effect and the action failure effect are different, and since the mode of the hold display image is changed by executing the hold change effect after the effect effect, It can be understood that the action effect is the action success effect, and that the action change effect is the action failure effect because the hold change effect is not executed after the action effect and the mode of the hold display image does not change. According to such a configuration, the effect mode of the effect effect is not limited, and the interest of the effect effect can be improved.

(Modification 7) In the above embodiment, the first operation in which the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 is displaced from the portrait orientation to the landscape orientation, and the second operation in which the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 is displaced from the landscape orientation to the portrait orientation. However, the description has been given of what is executed as a series of operations in the specific effect, but it is not limited to this. For example, for example, an effect of displacing the display device from the first state to the second state is executed as the first effect, and an effect of displacing the display device from the second state to the first state as the second effect different from the first effect. The first operation in which the display device is displaced from the first state to the second state and the second operation in which the display device is displaced from the second state to the first state are executed as a series of operations. You don't have to. In that case, the jackpot expectation may be changed depending on whether the second effect is executed after the first effect is executed or the second effect is executed after the first effect is executed. Good. With such a configuration, the interest can be improved even if the first operation and the second operation of the display device are not executed as a series of operations.

(Modification 8) In the above-described embodiment, the first operation in which the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated counterclockwise from the vertical state to the horizontal state, and the sub-image display device 9051 is in the horizontal state. Although the second operation in which the first operation and the second operation are similar to each other such as the second operation in which the first operation and the second operation are performed by rotating clockwise from the first operation, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the first operation, the display device is continuously displaced from the first state to the second state, and in the second operation, the display device is intermittently displaced from the second state to the first state. The first operation in which the device is displaced from the first state to the second state and the second operation in which the display device is displaced from the second state to the first state may be completely different operation modes. Further, the operation mode of the first operation and the operation mode of the second operation may each be executed in any one of a plurality of modes. In that case, the operation mode of the first operation, the operation mode of the second operation, or the combination of the operation mode of the first operation and the operation mode of the second operation is determined. Accordingly, the degree of expectation for a big hit may be different. With such a configuration, it is possible to attract more attention to the operation of the display device and improve interest.

(Modification 9) In the above-described embodiment, in the first motion in which the sub-image display device 9051 rotates counterclockwise from the vertical state and is displaced to the horizontal state, the image in which the character jumps under the cliff is displayed. In the second operation in which the sub-image display device 9051 is displayed and is rotated clockwise from the horizontal state to be displaced to the vertical state, the image in which the character jumps over the cliff has been described. It is not limited to this. A predetermined image displayed in association with the first movement of the display device from the first state to the second state, and a predetermined image displayed in association with the second movement of the display device from the second state to the first state The specific image may be an image in which any one of a plurality of modes is displayed. In that case, which form is the predetermined image displayed in association with the first motion, which form is the specific image displayed in connection with the second motion, or which is the form of the predetermined image? The jackpot expectation may be different depending on the combination with the aspect of the specific image. Further, as in the modified example 8, when the first operation mode and the second operation mode are any of the plurality of modes, the predetermined image and the specific image are changed according to the operation mode. The proportion of which aspect may be different may be different. With such a configuration, it is possible to attract more attention to the predetermined image and the specific image, and it is possible to improve the interest.

(Modification 10) In the above-described embodiment, in the small design display area 9051V, a display mode that is common to all of a plurality of types of decorative designs, for example, designs that show numbers in the same way as parts that show numbers in decorative designs. In the above description, the effect images showing a plurality of types of small patterns that can be identified are variably displayed as the notification information images, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the derivation of the fixed decorative pattern which is the display result, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the predetermined reach mode, or the pseudo combination of the special combination. Even when a decorative symbol or a special symbol such as “re” which is one of a plurality of types of lost combinations predetermined as a chance item is temporarily stopped and displayed, in the small symbol display area 9051V, the effect image showing the small symbol is reached. Alternatively, the display similar to that during high speed fluctuation may be performed without using the pseudo consecutive chance or the special symbol. Then, when the fixed decorative design is derived, the effect image showing the small design may be displayed in a manner that is common to all of the fixed decorative designs. That is, in the small symbol display area 9051V, an effect image showing the small symbol may be used to execute an effect that allows the player to know whether or not the variable display is being performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the variable display effect by the effect image showing the small symbol in the small symbol display area 9051V.

(Modification 11) In the above-described embodiment and modification 1, the display device including, for example, an LCD is displaced, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a large number of LEDs are arranged in a matrix. The present invention can also be applied to an accessory that displays with an LED, or an accessory called a versa writer that rotates or reciprocates LEDs arranged in a line to display a character or a graphic by an afterimage of light. In that case, for example, taking a versa writer as an example, in connection with the first operation in which the versa writer is displaced from the stationary state to the rotational state of the predetermined rotational speed, a predetermined image is displayed as an afterimage of light, and the versa writer has a predetermined rotational speed. It is only necessary to display the specific image as an afterimage of light in association with the second operation of displacing from the rotating state to the stationary state. As described above, the present invention is applicable not only to a display device including an LCD or the like, but also to a gaming machine including various display devices.

In the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the effect control CPU 90120 of the variable display time of the decorative pattern, and the variable pattern indicating the variable display mode such as the type of reach effect, one variable pattern when starting the variable display. Although the example in which the designated command is transmitted is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control CPU 90120 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying with two commands, in the game control microcomputer 90100, as the first command, the presence or absence of a variable display effect such as "slip" or "pseudo-relation" can be changed before reaching. A command indicating the display time and the variable display mode is transmitted, and as the second command, a command indicating the variable display time and the variable display mode after reaching the reach, such as the type of reach and the presence/absence of re-lottery effect, is transmitted. You may do it. In this case, the effect control CPU 90120 may perform effect control in the variable display based on the variable display time derived from the two commands. Note that the game control microcomputer 90100 notifies the variable display time by each of two commands, and the effect control CPU 90120 selects the specific variable display mode executed at each timing. You may When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, or the second command is sent after a predetermined time has elapsed after sending the first command. You may do so. Also, the variable display mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by using two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data to be stored in advance and prepared as the variation pattern designation command.

The present invention can be applied not only to the pachinko gaming machine 901 but also to a slot machine or the like. The slot machine is, for example, an arbitrary gaming machine that can perform a predetermined game such as variable display of symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information, and can give a predetermined game value based on the game result, and more specifically, By setting a predetermined number of bets for one game, the game can be started, and a display result of a variable display device that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each is derived and displayed. This is a gaming machine in which one game is finished and a prize can be generated according to the display result. In such a slot machine, features of the pachinko gaming machine 901 described in the above embodiment are provided by cooperation of hardware resources including an image display device of the slot machine and software that performs predetermined processing. It may be configured to include all or a part of the above.

In addition, various configurations including the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the image display operation in the image display device, the sound output operation in the speaker, and the lighting operation in the game effect lamp and the decorative LED. The production operation and the like can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, and encloses a game ball to generate a prize ball. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives points.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided by a removable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 901. Alternatively, it may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device included in a computer device or the like. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the hardware resources of other devices may be directly used on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

Further, in the above-mentioned embodiment, “the ratio is different” is not limited to the one in which the ratio is different because of the relationship such as A:B=70%:30% or A:B=30%:70%. This is a concept that includes a relationship such that A:B=100%:0% and the ratio is different.

Further, in the above embodiment, there are probability variation big hit and normal big hit as the big hit type, and based on the fact that it was decided as the probability variation big hit as the big hit type, the gaming machine controlled to the probability variation state after the big hit game has been shown. , But is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, with a special variable winning ball device provided with a predetermined probability variation area inside, the probability variation is determined based on the game ball passing through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game, and the big hit game It is also possible to apply the configuration shown in the above embodiment to a gaming machine that is controlled to be in the probable variation state after the end.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which, for example, a plurality of types of special symbols and decorative symbols “1” to “8” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed, but the variable display is such a mode. Not limited to For example, the variably displayed symbol does not necessarily have to be the same as the derivatized displayed symbol, and a symbol different from the variably displayed symbol may be derivatized and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately lighting and blinking the one type of symbol display. And, even in this case, one kind of symbol used for the variable display may be finally displayed and displayed, or a symbol different from the one kind of symbol may be finally displayed and displayed. It may be one.

Further, the random numbers may be synchronized by changing the update timing of the random numbers or changing the update range of the random numbers.

In the above embodiment, the main board 9011 stores a random value determination table, and the main board 9011 stores a random value determination table based on the random value extracted on the main board 9011 at the time of winning the start prize. With reference to the example, the random number value determination process is performed, the effect control board 9012 receives the determination result determined by the main board 9011, and executes the pre-reading notice effect based on the received determination result. The execution mode of the prefetching notice effect is not limited to this. For example, the effect control board 9012 stores the random number determination table, and the effect control board 9012 receives the random number value itself extracted on the main board 9011 from the main board 9011, and based on the received random value. The random number determination process may be executed with reference to the random number determination table, and the prefetching notice effect may be executed based on the determination result of the determination process. That is, the random number determination process may be performed by the effect control board 9012. Further, the random number determination process may be performed by both the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. For example, the effect control board 9012 may receive a part of the random number values and execute the random number judgment processing, and at the same time, receive the judgment result judged by the main board 9011. Specifically, for example, the effect control board 9012 receives a random number value to determine whether or not to be a big hit and, if it is a big hit, to determine the type of big hit, and the main board 9011 based on the random number value. You may make it receive the determination result of the fluctuation pattern type determined by. That is, the effect control board 9012 can execute the pre-reading notice effect based on the determination result determined by itself and the determination result determined by the main board 9011.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an interruption for receiving a production control command from the main board 9011 is generated on the side of the production control board 9012 when the production control INT signal from the main board 9011 is turned on. As explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an interrupt for receiving the effect control command may be generated by an interrupt request by the first bit of serial communication, for example.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment is a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 901 or the like), and is specified to maintain the aspect of production. A specific effect means capable of executing an effect (for example, effect control CPU 90120 capable of executing a specific effect that maintains the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051) is provided, and a period for maintaining the first aspect as the specific effect (secondary) It is possible to perform effects different from the period in which the image display device 9051 is maintained in the vertical direction and the period in which the second mode is maintained (the period in which the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the horizontal direction), and the second mode is maintained. The degree of expectation that is controlled to the advantageous state varies depending on the length of the period (for example, when the specific effect is executed, the longer the sub-image display device 9051 is held sideways, the greater the degree of expectation of jackpot). Is high). As a result, it is possible to pay attention to the period in which the mode of effect is maintained.

Further, when the second mode is maintained, other effects having a higher degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state are more likely to be executed than when the first mode is maintained (for example, Even if the count-up notice effect in which the number of counts by the predetermined character is the same, the jackpot expectation degree of the count-up notice effect executed when the specific effect is executed and the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the horizontal direction is: It is higher than the jackpot expectation of the count-up notice effect executed when the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the portrait orientation without executing the specific effect). As a result, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for being controlled to an advantageous state by executing another effect while the mode of the specific effect is maintained in the second mode.

Also, a notification effect means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that the mode of the specific effect has become the second mode (for example, a notification effect for notifying that the sub-image display device 9051 is turned sideways can be performed. CPU 90120 for performance control). Accordingly, it is possible to easily recognize that the aspect of the specific effect is the second aspect.

Further, as the specific effect, it is possible to execute an effect that changes stepwise from the first aspect to the second aspect in response to a plurality of times of variable display (for example, the pending change effect execution pattern shown in FIG. 46). HP4'-1 to HP4'-2, HP5'-1 to HP5'-2, HP6'-1 to HP6'-2, HP7'-1 to HP7'-2, etc.). As a result, the interest can be improved over a plurality of variable displays.

Further, a predetermined effect means capable of executing a plurality of aspects of the predetermined effect (for example, effect control CPU 90120 or the like capable of executing the call notice effect) is further provided, and depending on which aspect of the predetermined effect is executed. The ratio of the aspect of the specific effect to the second aspect is different (for example, when the call advance notice effect is executed, when the call of a predetermined character is "I do not want to do", the specific effect is executed). Therefore, there is a high possibility that the sub-image display device 9051 will face sideways). Thereby, it is possible to draw attention to the predetermined effect.

Further, during one variable display, an effect of changing from the first mode to the second mode and then changing to the first mode can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, a sub-image display). An effect of rotating the device 9051 from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction and then rotating it in the vertical direction is executed a plurality of times during one variable display). As a result, the interest in one variable display can be improved.

1 ... Pachinko gaming machine 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice control board 19 ... Driver board 120 ... Production control CPU
121... ROM
122... RAM
123... Display control parts 131a to 131c, 511... Filter circuit 132... Step-down converter circuit 133... Regulator circuit 140... Power supply monitoring circuit 521... Amplification circuit 800... Board case 802... Cover members KRE1 to KRE4... Receptacles 30AK10G, 30AK11G, 30AK20G. Ground conductors 30AK01R, 30AK10R, 30AK11R, 30AK12R,
30AK20R... Area 30AK0SC... Sections 30AK10D to 30AK13D, 30AK10CK, 30AK10CS,
30AK10RS, 30AK10A to 30AK14A, 30AK10P,
30AK11P, 30AK20P... Wiring pattern 30AK1S... Front surface layer 30AK2S... Back surface layer 30AK1L... Ground layer 30AK2L, 30AK4L... Power supply layer 30AK3L... Wiring layer 30AK1H, 30AK2H... Through hole 901... Pachinko gaming machine 902. 904A... Special symbol display device 904B... Special symbol display device 905... Image display device 906A... Ordinary winning ball device 906B... Ordinary variable winning ball device 907... Special variable winning ball device 908L, 908R... Speaker 909... Game effect lamp 9011... Main Board 9012 ... Production control board 9013 ... Voice control board 9014 ... Lamp control board 9015 ... Relay board 9020 ... Normal pattern display 9021 ... Gate switch 9022A ... First starting opening switch 9022B ... Second starting opening switch 9023 ... Count switch 90100 ... Game control microcomputer 90101... ROM
90102... RAM
90103... CPU
90104... Random number circuit 90105... I/O
90120... CPU for production control
90121 ... ROM
90122... RAM
90123... Display control unit 90124... Random number circuit 90125... I/O

Claims (2)

A gaming machine that variably displays identification information and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A pattern forming a plurality of signal wirings is formed, and a plurality of signal wirings are provided on a substrate to which a plurality of electric components are connected.
The pattern is
A parallel wiring portion having a first shape in which the plurality of signal wirings are parallel or substantially parallel;
At least one signal wiring of the plurality of signal wirings includes a specific wiring portion having a second shape that is not parallel to other signal wirings,
The wiring length of each signal wiring included in the plurality of signal wiring is the same or substantially the same,
further,
Display means capable of displaying an image, which is displaceable in a plurality of states,
A specific effect means capable of executing a specific effect for maintaining the state of the display means ,
As the specific effect, it is possible to execute an effect in which the period during which the display unit is maintained in the first state and the period during which the display unit is maintained in the second state are different from each other,
Depending on the length of the period for maintaining the second condition, expectations Ri is Do different controlled in the preferred state,
The display means is
In relation to the first motion of displacing from the first state to the second state, a first image is motion-displayed in a first direction corresponding to the motion direction of the first motion,
In association with the second motion of displacing from the second state to the first state, a second image is motion-displayed in a second direction corresponding to the motion direction of the second motion,
Corresponding to the variable display of identification information, it is possible to display a variable display of simple identification information that is simpler than identification information.
Variable display of simple identification information is displayed in different modes in the first state and the second state,
A gaming machine characterized by that. In the specific wiring portion, a first signal wiring and a plurality of second signal wirings having the second shape that are not parallel to the first signal wiring are provided.
In the specific wiring portion, at least two second signal wirings are adjacent to each other, and a conductor is not provided in a predetermined area between the adjacent second signal wirings,
The electrical signal transmitted by the predetermined signal wiring includes a synchronization signal that is synchronized with the electrical signal transmitted by the other signal wiring, and an asynchronous signal that is not synchronized with the electrical signal transmitted by the other signal wiring,
The asynchronous signal is transmitted by the first signal line,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein: